JP6510462B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine that performs variable display.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot by a launch device into a game area by a launch device and the game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to In addition, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, Therefore, there is one configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for a predetermined game medium to one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display device, variable display of identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing, and variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined gaming medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and a specific prize is generated, the gaming state is determined to be a predetermined gaming value to the player There is one which is configured to be in a state of giving to (so-called slot machine).

  In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a hit ball, or in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate the right and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions of the prize ball payout.

  In pachinko gaming machines, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started on the variable display device based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. If you do, a "big hit" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol (final stop symbol) finally stop-display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. And, in each opening period, when there are winnings to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). In addition, an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be referred to as a "round game".

  Furthermore, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state consistent with the specific display result. Motion, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of display symbols are changed, and a big hit can occur before the final result is displayed An effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a "reach state") is referred to as a "reach effect". In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “off”, and the fluctuation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 describes that a specific display corresponding to a variable display is displayed, and the degree of expectation is notified by changing the display mode of the specific display.

JP, 2011-171, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the change in the display mode of the specific display is monotonous, the interest can not be sufficiently improved.

  Then, this invention prevents that the change of the display mode of a specific display becomes monotonous, and it aims at providing the game machine which can improve interest.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine), and variable display (for example, first special symbol or Variable display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 101, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 9, image display device 905, game control microcomputer 560, for game control) for performing the second special symbol, variable display of the effect symbol The microcomputer 90100, the first special symbol display 8a, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol display device 904B), and the specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, the active display Specific display means (for example, active display area 9F, active display area AHA, 1 Hold storage display unit 9a, first start winning storage display area 905HL, second reserve storage display unit 9b, second start winning storage display area 905HR), and state change display (for example, meter display) that can change in stages State effect display means (for example, meter display area 90) capable of displaying and specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, speech preview) during execution of variable display Device 905, step S90726 of FIG. 69), and the first selection effect (for example, character lottery effect, see FIG. 70B) for the first type of the specific effect (for example, the type of the character of the speech preview). The first selection effect execution means capable of executing (for example, the effect control CPU 90120, the image display device 905, step S90722 in FIG. 69) And a second selection effect (for example, character color lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (C)) for the second type of the specific effect (for example, the speech balloon and the character color) 2 selection effect executing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90724 in FIG. 69), and the specific display means has a plurality of types of display modes (for example, the first to The specific display can be displayed by the three modes), and the specific display can be displayed by changing to any one of a plurality of display modes according to the display step of the state change display (for example, , A portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8108 and S8109 (refer to the meter display / active display correspondence table shown in FIG. 42 (B)) , Even when the specific display after the change are displayed by the same display mode, different expectations in accordance with the display stage of the status change display, the specific effect execution means, the first selection effect The specific effect (for example, an illustration in which the selected type of character is combined with the color of the balloon or the character) corresponding to the combination of the effect result of the second selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect (for example, 70 (D)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the change in the display mode of the specific display from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, since the player can be made to pay attention to a plurality of selection effects and their effects as well as the specific effects, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2) In the gaming machine of Means 1, notification effect execution means for executing notification effect when the display step of the state change display changes (for example, a portion where the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes steps S8106 and S8107 ) May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the state change display.

(Means 3) In the gaming machine of Means 1 or 2, even when the specific display is displayed in the same display mode, the degree of expectation is configured to be different according to the display step of the state change display. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, even if the display mode of the active display is the same as the first mode, the meter display is the second stage rather than the first stage. The higher the degree of expectation).

  According to such a configuration, even after the display mode of the specific display changes, it can be expected that the display step of the state change display changes.

(Means 4) In the gaming machine of any of means 1 to 3, the gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, wherein a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) is performed during execution of variable display Specific effect means (for example, the part for which the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes steps S8011 and S8105) that can execute) and a suggested effect (for example, battle instruction effect) that is to be controlled to an advantageous state The specific display means is capable of displaying the corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the specific display, and the specific display means is capable of displaying the suggestion effect means. It is possible to execute the suggestive effect by any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes (for example, the battle command timetable by blue, green or red) 50), depending on whether the corresponding display is displayed in a specific display mode during execution of the specific effect, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the suggested effect is different (shown in FIG. 50) When the active display is displayed in the third mode (red), the display may be configured such that the display color at the time of the battle command becomes “red”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the corresponding display and the presentation mode of the suggestion effect.

(Means 5) A special effect execution means (for example, effect) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a meter display change effect) for changing the display stage of the state change display in any one of the means 1 to 4 The microcomputer for control 100 is a portion that executes steps S8011 and S8105.) The special effect execution unit is an effect of any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the first effect mode to the third effect mode). Depending on the mode, the special effect can be executed, and the rate at which the display stage of the state change display changes is different according to which effect mode the special effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E). (See the meter display change presentation mode determination table)).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the effect mode of the special effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 6) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, the state change display means changes the state change display into a specific mode (for example, the state change display when the state change display changes to a specific stage (for example, fifth stage)). , Special display) may be configured to be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it can be easily recognized that the state change display has changed to the specific stage.

(Means 7) In the gaming machine of Means 6, the state change display means can display the state change display in a plurality of types of specific modes (for example, the special displays of the first to third special display modes). The specific mode may be configured to include a specific mode (for example, a special display of the third special display mode) notifying that it has been determined that control to be in the advantageous state is made.

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the state change display changing to the specific mode, it is possible to pay attention to which of the plural types of specific modes to change, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the embodiments according to means 8 to 15 described below are included in the modes for carrying out the invention described later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-23551, a game in which the reliability to be a big hit is different depending on the mode of the speech warning to indicate whether the game is a big hit on the character's line of the character performed during the variation display of the decorative pattern. There was a chance. Also, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-124385, when the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach symbol, the display effect is executed to select which aspect of the super reach is to be performed. Had a gaming machine to However, in such gaming machines, there has been a problem that the interest of gaming is insufficient. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

(Means 8) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine),
Variable display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 905, game control microcomputer 90100, first special symbol display device 904A for performing variable display (for example, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of special symbol) , The second special symbol display device 904B),
Specific effect executing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90726 in FIG. 69) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, speech preview) during execution of the variable display;
A first selection effect executing means (for example, a character lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (B)) for the first type of the specific effect (for example, the type of the character of the speech preview) (for example, see FIG. 70 (B)) For example, the effect control CPU 90120, the image display device 905, and step S90722) in FIG.
The second selection effect (for example, character color lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (C)) of the second type of the specific effect (for example, the speech balloon and the character color) Effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90724 in FIG. 69), and
The specific effect execution means corresponds to an aspect corresponding to a combination of the effect result of the first selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect (for example, the character of the selected type and the color of the balloon and the characters It is characterized in that the specific effect (see, for example, FIG. 70 (D)) of the combined mode is executable.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a plurality of selection effects and their effects as well as the specific effects. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

(Means 9) In the gaming machine of means 8,
The mode of the first type is the type of character (for example, character E, character F) used in the specific effect, and the degree of expectation of being notified of advantageous content for the player is different for each type of character (for example, , See Figure 67),
The second type of aspect is a color (for example, gold, red) of characters used in the specific effect, and is configured such that the degree of expectation in which content advantageous to the player is notified differs for each color of characters (See, for example, FIG. 67).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the specific effect but also to the selection effect of the character type and the character color and the effect results thereof. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 10) In the gaming machine of means 8 or means 9,
The first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means respectively have different display areas (for example, different display areas of the image display device 905) different in the first selection effect and the second selection effect. It may be configured to be executable in the display area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly and easily visually recognize a plurality of selection effects and their effect results.

(Means 11) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 10,
The first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means are configured to be able to notify the effect result of the first selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect at different timings, respectively (For example, see steps S90721 and S90723 in FIG. 69, and FIG. 70B and FIG. 70C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly and easily visually recognize the rendering results of the plurality of selection effects.

(Means 12) In the gaming machine according to any one of measures 8 to 11,
The predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing predetermined effects (for example, effects of super reach, variable display effects of decorative symbols) for notifying whether it is advantageous for the player different from the specific effect or not The image display apparatus 905 further includes step S90720) in FIG.
The predetermined effect execution means can execute reach effect as the predetermined effect,
The specific effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the specific effect at an execution time at least a part of which overlaps with the execution time of the predetermined effect (for example, a serif announcement is performed at a reach establishment timing) ).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game when the reach effect is performed.

(Means 13) In any gaming machine of means 8 to means 12,
A special image (for example, a character of a selected type) showing a combination of the rendering result of the first selection effect and the rendering result of the second selection effect when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means Special image display means (for example, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 905, FIG. 69) for displaying an image showing an image and an image showing an aspect of the color of a balloon or a character (see FIG. 70D). It may be configured to further include step S90726).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly confirm the rendering results of the plurality of selection effects when the specific effect is being executed.

(Means 14) In the gaming machine according to any one of measures 8 to 13,
Specific effect determination means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, step S 90542 in FIG. 66, FIG. 67) for determining the content of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means;
Selection effect determination means (for example, CPU for effect control 90120, FIG. 66) for determining the contents of the first selection effect and the second selection effect respectively executed by the first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means And step S 90543) of the
The selection effect determining means may be configured to determine the contents of the first selection effect and the second selection effect corresponding to the contents of the specific effect determined by the specific effect determining means. .

  Here, when the content of the specific effect is determined based on the effect of the first selection effect and the second selection effect after being determined separately, two determinations of the first selection effect and the second selection effect are made. It needs some processing to do. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the means 14, since the first selection effect and the second selection effect are automatically determined if the specific effect is determined, only one determination of the specific effect is sufficient. As a result, the content of the presentation can be efficiently determined by simple processing.

(Means 15) In the gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 14,
According to the player's operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 9031A, the predetermined operation of the player, etc.), effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) regarding the game is possible.
When adjusting the effect, it is possible to display the adjustment condition of the effect adjustment (for example, the volume adjustment condition, the brightness adjustment condition, the mode switching condition, etc.),
First state (for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state other than during super reach effect, or a customer waiting state, etc., not displaying an error, in a slot machine, a gaming state other than during continuous effect, or a customer In the waiting state or the like and the state where the error is not displayed, etc.) the adjustment status is visibly displayed regardless of the player's operation (for example, the volume control is performed according to the processing execution of step S90162 in FIG. The status is displayed on the image display device 905, etc.),
A second state (for example, a jackpot gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine) which is a state different from the first state and executes a special effect (for example, a jackpot effect in a pachinko gaming machine, a super reach effect, a continuous staging in a slot machine, etc. In the gaming state during super reach effect, the gaming state during continuous effect in slot machines, etc., the adjustment status is made difficult to visually recognize or invisible (for example, processing execution such as step S90814 in FIG. 64 by CPU 90120 for effect control) According to the volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 905, etc.), the adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's operation (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 9031A, etc.) Step S90903 of FIG. 71 by the effect control CPU 90120. Processing such as volume adjustment situation according to the execution is displayed for a predetermined period in the image display device 905) may be configured so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the special effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by an effect control CPU. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a meter display final display mode determination table, a meter display and active display corresponding table, and a special display mode determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a meter display change production mode determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a meter display change production timing determination table. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of meter display change production and active display change production. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of meter display change production and active display change production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a display color decision table at the time of battle command. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a volume condition display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production execution setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a words advance presentation effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production execution processing. FIG. 17 is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a character lottery effect, a character color lottery effect, and a serif announcement. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit time production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the case of volume change operation presence during a big hit presentation.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display synchronizes” means that the start point and end point of the variable display are the same and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the type of big hit (usually the display color may differ depending on whether it is a big hit or a probability change big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color which reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the off color For example, it is displayed in blue at the time of out, while it is displayed in red at the time of big hit Note that the type of big hit (usually either big hit or positive variation big hit) The display color may be made different depending on the presence or absence.) The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is the same as the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable that the display image has a display color (eg, black) different from that of the background image in order to prevent the display from being obscured.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). At the lower right of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as "special symbol indicator (variable display unit Sometimes referred to as ")".

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as "starting winning opening" or "starting opening".

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening The arrangement ratio of nails in the vicinity of the first start winning opening 13 or the arrangement of the nails in the vicinity of the first starting winning opening 13 makes it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 and the winning ratio of the second starting winning opening 14 May be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  To the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, ie, the first reserved storage number (pending storage is also referred to as "start storage" or "start winning storage"). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators to display the number of activated winning balls entered the second start winning opening 14, ie the second reserve memory number Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage count and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage count are provided. ing. The first hold display is displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a corresponding to each of the first hold storages. In addition, the second hold display is displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b corresponding to each of the second hold storages. Although this embodiment shows the case where the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are displayed individually, the total number of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages is a total number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory display part which displays the number of pending | holding memory may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfaction of execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Also, when configured as such, in the combined hold storage display unit, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the winning order for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 To be displayed in a recognizable manner as to whether it is the first pending storage or the second pending storage (for example, the first pending storage is displayed in red and the second pending storage is displayed in blue) It may be configured.

  In addition, between the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, an active display is displayed in which a specific display corresponding to the currently displayed variable display An area 9F is provided. In this embodiment, in the active display area 9F, display similar to that of the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b is performed as a specific display. Hereinafter, the display of the same mode as the hold display displayed in the active display area 9F is also referred to as “active display”. In addition, as long as it can be recognized that the display corresponds to the currently displayed variable display, the display does not necessarily have to be the same as the display in the hold display, and another graphic or character may be displayed. .

  In this embodiment, the "specific display corresponding to variable display" is displayed on the active display displayed in the active display area 9F and on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the second hold storage display unit 9b. It corresponds to the pending display. The specific display is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, but may be any display including at least a hold display and corresponding to variable display in some form. In this embodiment, the active display area 9F is configured to be capable of displaying an active display. However, the active display area does not have to be displayed, and the active display area 9F may not be provided.

  In addition, a meter display area 90 is provided on the upper side of the active display area 9F in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The meter display area 90 displays a meter display in which a meter value changes due to a meter display change effect described later. In this embodiment, in addition to the display mode in which the meter value is not displayed, the meter display displays the meter value in the display modes of the first to fifth stages.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In this embodiment, as described later, microcomputer 560 for game control which controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol transmits the fluctuation pattern command which can specify fluctuation time, and is received by microcomputer 100 for effect control. According to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol is controlled. Therefore, since the fluctuation time is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation display of the rendering symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the event that a change in data of the fluctuation pattern command or the like occurs, the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 side and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as data corruption of a command occurs, a situation may occur in which the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the rendering symbol are not completely synchronized.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, on the left side, a movable member 78 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moving when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a notice effect (a movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is performed. Note that the movable member 78 may be operated, for example, in a pseudo-series effect, not limited to the movable object preview effect or the super reach effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning openings (ordinary winning openings) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls determined in advance based on the winning of the gaming balls. The game balls that have won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is a high state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a variation display result of the special symbol is increased as compared to the normal state). In the high probability state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an decoration LED 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right of the game area 7, two speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means operable by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that allows the player to perform a pressing operation, but also with a dial that allows the player to perform a rotation operation. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of an effect) by rotating the dial.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit is a probability change, the game state is shifted to a so-called positive change state after the big hit game is over, and the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (namely, special symbol It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display in the displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, it does not extend the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the "open extension state"), but in the normal symbol oddity state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. By transitioning to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the high base state, transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol time short state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the rendering symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol becomes high (in other words, It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start winning will occur. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 53 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the game state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 53 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 53 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 53 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data thus obtained is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 53. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 53 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 There is. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of the big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35. Control the sound output from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 through the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 87 for operating the effect blade role members 79 a and 79 b through the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player via the input port 107.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving the LEDs and the lamps are input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. In addition, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, if the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, for example, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command (see FIG. 13). You may do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation specification command or the second symbol variation specification command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the fluctuation time timer described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been saved is restarted, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is resumed, When the value of the fluctuation time timer which has been timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a special symbol process flag described later. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process processing is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the fluctuation time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not, instead of transmitting the display result specification command at the time of power failure recovery. . Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, it is fluctuating at power failure. It may be determined not to be in the state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  The CPU 56 may first check whether the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is three. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates at power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted, judging that it is not inside.

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 53 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 53 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is made a big hit symbol, reach production is always executed (However, in the case of sudden positive change big hit, sudden change positive hit large hit symbol (for example "135") without becoming reach) May appear stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the microcomputer 560 for game control decides whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. Do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state. In the normal symbol process processing of step S27, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 32, and the variable display result is derived or displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol Executes a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state or in the closed state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where the gaming machine is configured such that all the big hit types are probability variation big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. In addition, when it is configured to provide a small hit if all the big hit type is a definite variation big hit, it is transitioned to a definite variation state (high probability state) and a sudden definite variation big hit without a short time state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach”. The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB 2-4, Super PA 3-3-Super PA 3-4, Super PB 3-3-Super PB 3-4, Special PG 1-1-Special PG 1-3, Special PG 2-1-Special PG 2-2 fluctuation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of an effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability change big hit, a normal CA 3-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and a fluctuation with normal reach and a pseudo ream It is classified into normal CA 3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, and super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type accompanied by super reach. Also, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA 4-1 which is a variation pattern type including non-reach variation pattern and special CA 4-2 which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern with reach. ing. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Moreover, in the case of a loss, non-reach CA2-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns without reach or pseudo ream or slip rendition, and fluctuation patterns not accompanied by reach but pseudo ream or slip rendition Includes non-reach CA2-2 that is the variation pattern type that includes, non-reach CA2-3 that is the variation pattern type that includes the variation pattern of reduced variation that does not involve reach or pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition, and includes the variation pattern that includes only normal reach A variation pattern type including normal CA2-4 that is a variation pattern type, a normal CA2-5 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two reruns of pseudoruns, and a variation pattern with a normal reach and one rerun pseudorun. And normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type including, and variation pattern types with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4) Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 53 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), eight judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit classification determination table 131b, 2 judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 2/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability change big hit (2 round big hit) as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, and the game There are cases where it is decided that the normal special hit and the probability change big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that grants the game value more than the value, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be awarded is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 7R probability variation big hit that controls 7 rounds of big hit games or a 5R probability variation big hit that controls 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifted to a time saving state (high base state) after the jackpot gaming state is over (see steps S167 and 168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished 100 times, the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140 described later). In this embodiment, the time saving state ends even if a big hit occurs before ending the execution of the variable display 100 times after shifting to the time saving state (see step S132 described later).

  The "probably big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a high probability state) It is also shifted to the time saving state (high base state) (see steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the termination of that sudden oddity big hit gaming state is transitioned to the definite change state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, it is shifted to the positive change state and in the short time state (high base state) (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, according to the jackpot type determination result, a fluctuation pattern type, a random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for big hit shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normally big hit”, and FIG. 9 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in, the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal hit and the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B. A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly big hit big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number (random 2) for change pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows a change pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C used when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss are used based on random numbers (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the separate fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135C are used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state and when the total number of pending storages is three or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-transition variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability variation state or the time saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, although the case of using the common fluctuation variation type determination table 135C for deviation for time variation is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, for deviation for probability variation / time reduction As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for loss (depending on the ratio of determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outset variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of pending storages is less than 3 and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more Although the case where two types of tables, such as the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B used for, are used is shown, the way of dividing the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total pending storage numbers, 1 total pending storage number, 2 total pending storage numbers) The outset fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately for the total number of pending storages of three, the total number of pending storages for four, and so on). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, and the total pending storage number 4.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages, but according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number, the outlier variation pattern type determination A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number) Out of change variation pattern type judgment table for 0, 1 first pending storage number, 2 for 1st pending storage number, 3 for 1st pending storage number, 4 for 1st pending storage number, ... Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the first pending storage number 0 to 2, for the first pending storage number 3, for the first pending storage number 4. Even in this case, when the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. . In addition, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific effect mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least the expectation for a big hit is set high, such as a variation pattern with super reach, and the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expected degree for big hit (reliability)” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific effect mode is executed. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation when the variable indication with the super reach is performed is determined as (the ratio at which the super reach is performed when it is determined to be a big hit) / (when it is determined to be a big hit and as a loss) The rate at which the super reach is performed in both cases is calculated by calculating

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. A judgment value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of 3, normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, and super CA 2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination Is 230-251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the game state is normal and the game state is off, the value of the random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern type If 1 is 1 to 79, it can be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least not with the reach (without the effect such as the pseudo ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with reach) For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, the total pending storage number) Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are configured to be assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, although the case of using the common jackpot variation pattern type determination table regardless of the current gaming state is shown, whether the current gaming state is a definite change state The jackpot variation pattern type determination table separately prepared may be used depending on whether it is in the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting the shortening out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B). Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of pending storages (the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state The threshold of) may be made different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the total number of pending storages is three (or, for example, when the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is two), for shortening By selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss and making the variation pattern of the shortening variation determined in some cases, when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time saving state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 Even in the case of (or, for example, even in the case of 0 or 1 where the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is smaller), the variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected for shortening It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "big hit" or "small hit", the change pattern determination is performed according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect pattern is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes normal CA 3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo link. The case where it is classified into a certain normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super reach (sometimes with a pseudo reach with a super reach) is shown. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA 4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA 4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with a reach. The case of being classified into 2 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 11 (B), you may divide a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of production | presentation, such as a pseudo | simulation series and a slip production, instead of dividing a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1 which are fluctuation patterns without pseudo ream or slip rendition, and the special CA 4-2 involves pseudo ream or slip rendition You may comprise so that special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines that the variable display result is “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 to A 003 (H) are presentation control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for designating a start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen. In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / suspiciously definite variation jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the “normal jackpot”, and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is in the “normal jackpot”. In the case of "Suddenly Positive Variation Big Hit" or "Small Hit", the small hit / sudden positive variation big hit start specification command (A003 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 1 designated command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 specified command (A 301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. Note that the big hit end 2 designated command (A 302 (H)) is used when the big hit game due to “probable variation big hit” is ended. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state background specification command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the pending storage information, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased for the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (the first pending storage number addition designation Although the case where the command and the second pending storage number addition designation command are transmitted is shown, the form of the pending storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, for example, the pending storage of the following aspect Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and in that one command, which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased is specified, and the number of pending storages of the increased one (The first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as pending storage information, and which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has been specified in that one command, and the total pending storage count is EXT data May be set and transmitted.

(3) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage has increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As pending storage information, which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 the start winning combination (which one of the first pending storage and the second pending storage increased) is specified In addition to transmitting the effect control command (the first start winning specifying command, the second starting winning specifying command), the pending storage number specifying command for specifying the pending storage number is separately transmitted, and The increased number of pending storages (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is the effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the judgment results when winning. is there. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see FIG. 22) described later, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether it will be a small hit or not, the type of big hit It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined in the winning-time effect processing described later that the “off” is to occur, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is, and which display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning combination A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is normal and off at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes the non-reach CA2-1 based on the change category 1 command being received. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA 2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  The threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above change categories belongs to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. The values are derived by picking up values that can be the boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the subsequent variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and they are assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that may be a boundary of the range of the determined value.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state becomes a definite variation state, a short time state, and a departure at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 in step S232 of the prize time rendering process described later It is determined whether or not .about.219. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (ie, if it becomes the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “08 (H)” Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send variation category 10 command.

  Note that, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be allocated to the range of the determination value 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when performing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the effect at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is a disconnection, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the determination processing of the gaming state in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes “probable big hit” at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the prize effect processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning presentation processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not necessarily the same between when the winning determination is made at the start winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command It may also occur that the pattern type does not match the fluctuation pattern type actually used in the fluctuation display. However, in this embodiment, for at least non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 variation pattern types, common judgment values are allocated regardless of the total number of pending storages. There is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Therefore, even if it is constituted so that the display change production mentioned below may be performed only to the change display judged at the time of winning when it becomes a change pattern classification of non reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3. Good. In such a configuration, the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, only when it is determined that the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1, super CA 2-7, and super CA 3-3 is selected. Sends the variation category 1 command, variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only), and does not send variation category command in the case of winning determination result of other variation pattern types. May be In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it becomes other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 and super CA3-3, even if it transmits fluctuation category command which shows that fluctuation pattern classification can not be specified. Good.

  Note that the on-hold notice effect is a type of so-called pre-reading advance notice effect that is executed before the variable display to be subjected to the on-off notice effect is started, and the first on-hold storage display unit 9a or the second on-hold storage display unit It is the advance notice effect performed by displaying the pending display in 9b in a display mode different from the normal mode. The on-hold notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the on-off effect or the on-hold display is displayed, based on the occurrence of the start-up winning for the variable display to be a notice target. In addition, based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be the advance notice target, the display of the hold display is temporarily started in the normal display mode at the timing when the appearance effect or the hold display is displayed, and then the predetermined timing (for example, The on-hold notice effect may be executed by changing the on-hold display to a display mode different from the normal display timing at the on-hold shift timing).

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs when the time saving state (high base state), or the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game Except when it occurs (see steps S1215A and S1216A), the process of the winning determination is executed each time a start winning occurs, and the symbol designation command shown in FIG. 15 is transmitted and the variations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 A category command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designating command and variation category command, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it will be a big hit in advance or reach before the variation display of the advance notice object is started based on the received symbol specification command and variation category command. Execute a pending notice effect to give notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8 a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special Image display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the image display that performs the presentation with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed every round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also the processing to start the big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where random numbers such as the jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer as hold storage, the predetermined information stored as the hold storage is It is not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit may be determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a pending storage in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer .

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time-shortening flag indicating that the gaming state is the time-shortening state (high base state) is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize effect processing is executed to determine in advance the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step) (step S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218A) and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218A and S1219A, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning on first start winning opening 13 occurs and a winning at-a-time effect process of step S1217A is executed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  However, if it is determined in step S 1215 A or step S 1216 A that Y was not determined to be executed in step S 1217 A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first pending storage count addition specification command in step S 1220 A. Control is not performed to transmit the determination result specifying command (design designation command, variation category command) at the time of winning. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a value indicating the incompletion determination result can not be specified (for example, "FF (H)") is set as the EXT data specification result specification A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the processing of step S1215A, only when the gaming state is the low base state, the processing of step S1217A is performed. A prize effect process is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1216A, step S1217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S 1217 A only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S 1217 A to execute the prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (B). In the second starting opening switch passage process executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending opening). Whether or not the value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) is confirmed (step S1211 B). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 53 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 2nd starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the second special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218 B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 B and S1219 B, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the second start winning opening 14 is start-up winning and the winning-time effect processing of step S1217 B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1218 B to S1220 B and the winning at presentation processing of step S1217 B is executed, symbol designation is performed. A set of three commands of a command, a variation category command, and a second pending storage count addition designation command is sent collectively in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second starting opening switch passage process, the same process as step S1215A may be performed, and if the time saving state is selected, the effect process at the time of winning in step S1217B may not be executed. That is, only when it is the normal state (low base state), the winning a prize effect process of step S 1217 B may be executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as step S1216A may be performed, and if a big hit game is being performed, the effect process in step S1217B may not be executed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing processing, it is possible not to execute winning a prize production processing of step S1217 B (that is, it is possible not to execute the winning a prize determination processing for the second special symbol) .

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a prize-time effect process of steps S1217A and S1217B. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within the range of any judgment value by executing the winning presentation process. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. Execute a display change presentation foretelling that it will be a big hit or a super reach during the variation display of the production design by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state) Whether or not it is confirmed (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit has occurred before, it changes from the normal state to the positive change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the in-winning effect processing of step S 1217 A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing at step S1217 B), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and whether it is a short time state (specifically, whether a positive change flag or a short time flag is set) Determine In addition, after confirming whether or not the vehicle is in the definite variation state and the time saving state in step S225 at the start winning combination, a plurality of variable displays are actually started until the variation display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is a definite change state and whether it is a short time state at the start winning combination, until the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. (For example, when a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219) Determines that “08 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (ie, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU sets thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 79 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (ie, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (ie, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in ascending order of threshold value, so the one determined in the later order threshold is used. It does not fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 or less of the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order of threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, in ascending order of threshold value. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may be always set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern types that cause "super reach", it is determined whether or not "super reach". be able to.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be a symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at-step presentation processing in step S1217A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using the special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning processing process at step S1217 B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "normal big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the “probable big hit” is made, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 100 (i.e., 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228 and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which of the values of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the fluctuation pattern type set in step S232 The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “0 B (H)”, “10 B (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types A display change presentation described later may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  FIG.23 and FIG.24 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning a prize processing process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and the comparison with the jackpot determination value in the positive change state (high probability state) may not be performed (specifically, step S220). Only the process may be performed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, it is between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual change. Deviation can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the pending storage number subtraction designated command (the first pending storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control in the order of the designated command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designated command). Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S1214A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the decision result of the big hit type, it decides the stop symbol of the special symbol which one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9” becomes the big hit symbol Do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D (FIG. 9 (D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). In this embodiment, the time-shortening flag is set when transitioning to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit normally, and is also shifted to the definite changing state at the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit The time saving flag is set because it is also transferred. Therefore, when it is determined as Y in step S95, control is normally performed with a definite change state and a short state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, in addition to the time control is controlled only after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit. There are times when

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A (as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern as any of a plurality of types). FIG. 10A is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Step 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, a release variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation for disconnection shown in FIG. 10 (B). Pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the out-of-transition fluctuation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in a definite variation state or a short time state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories (see FIG. Although the case where it is a table different from 10 (B) is shown, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1). May not perform the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B as a table used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100 (see FIG. 11). And the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) are selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. And based on the determination result of whether to set it as a reach, the process of step S95-S100 may be performed, and you may make it determine a fluctuation pattern classification. In this case, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and the reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10) Prepare the normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and the super CA 2-7 (including variation pattern types) and select one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table matches, for example, in the determination of whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the prize production process. Whether or not to reach may be determined in advance by determining whether or not it is reached. In addition, in view of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach deviates” according to the fluctuation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to configure in advance to determine whether or not to be a "non-reach out" and to perform on-hold notice effect.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation process, CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Note that whether or not the pending storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S1121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 56 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, CPU 56, if it is set, a probability change flag indicating that it is a positive change state, a short time flag indicating that it is a short time state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the short time state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot”, the jackpot start 1 designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 003 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 specification command (command A 301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is "probable variation big hit", the big hit end 2 specification command (command A 302 (H) And, if it is "Suddenly Certainly Big Variation Big Hit", the small hit / suddenly big variation big hit end specification command (command A 303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the normal big hit (step S166). In addition, whether or not it is a case to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01" or not It can judge by confirming. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S166), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts the gaming state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction number counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (step S168).

  The CPU 56 sets a probability change flag and changes the gaming state into a definite state unless normally ending the big hit game based on the big hit (that is, when ending the big hit game based on a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit). At the same time as transition (step S169), the time saving flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  In this embodiment, when the above process is executed, control is also performed to the short time state when controlled to the probability change state, so the normal state (low probability / low base state) as the gaming state ), There are three states: short time state (low probability / high base state), and probability change state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the fact that the start flag is set, based on the fact that the end flag is set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 6 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S621), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this case, for example, if the big hit start 1 specified command is received, the big hit start 1 specified command reception flag is set, and if the big hit start 2 specified command is received, the big hit start 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly definite oddity big hit start designation command (command A 003 (H)) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly positive oddity big hit start designation command reception flag (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S625), the CPU for effect control 101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 specified command is received, the big hit end 1 specified command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 specified command is received, the big hit end 2 specified command received flag set.

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command (command A 303 (H)) (step S627), the CPU 101 for production control sets the small hit / suddenly odd variation big hit end designation command reception flag (Step S628).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S501) S652).

  If the received effect control command is any of the fluctuation category commands (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores the received fluctuation category command in the fluctuation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S65). S654).

  If the received effect control command is the first pending storage number addition designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 stores the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S656). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to include the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first pending storage number addition designation command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the first start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S657).

  If the received effect control command is the second pending storage number addition designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 101 is configured to store the second pending storage number in the second pending storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S659). Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to include the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second pending storage number addition designation command. , And stored in the first free storage area of the second start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S660).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area. Among these, FIG. 36 (A) shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 36 (B) shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 36A, in the first start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218A to S1220A of the first start port switch passing process of FIG. 20 and steps S1218B to S1220B of the second start port switch passing process, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start hole. When there is a start winning to the winning opening 14, within one timer interrupt, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number Three commands of addition specification command) are transmitted in a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each storage area 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area 1 to 4, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage count addition specification A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the change category command, and the pending storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt, so the effect control CPU 101 designates the symbol in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designation command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the pending storage count addition designation command is received, it is understood that if the first pending storage count addition designation command is received, the first pending storage is increased by 1, and the second pending storage count addition designation command If it is determined that the second pending storage has increased by one if it is received, it is the first with the temporarily stored symbol specifying command and the variation category command if it is received the first pending storage count addition designation command. 1 Hold storage number addition specification command is stored in the first start winning command storage area, and if the second hold storage number addition specification command is received, the second storage with the temporarily stored symbol specification command and the change category command Store the number addition specification command in the second start winning command storage area (In FIG. 36, the first start winning command) An example is shown in which commands are stored in all storage areas of storage areas 1 to 4 of the storage area, and commands are stored only in storage area 1 of storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Has been

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is sequentially displayed in steps S664 and S668 described later at the timing when variation display of the production symbol is started each time variation display of the production symbol is started. It is deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the storage content of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 (B) is deleted. . Then, if the second pending storage does not newly occur, only the first pending storage is stored, so the first shown in FIG. It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area, and the content of the first start winning command storage area is shifted. For example, when the variable display of a new rendering symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 36 (A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in storage area 2 The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the pending storage count addition designating command, which are received when the starting winning combination occurs, are also referred to as a command upon starting winning combination when comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start winning combination, a pending storage number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number has increased is comprehensively represented. In some cases, it is also referred to as pending storage information. In addition, whether or not to be a big hit or small hit determined in the winning winning process at the start winning (see FIG. 22), the determination result of the big hit type, the symbol specification command which is a command showing the determination result of the variation pattern type When expressing the fluctuation category command comprehensively, it is also referred to as a winning judgment result specification command or judgment result information.

  If the received effect control command is the first hold memory number subtraction specification command (step S661), the CPU 101 for production control subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold memory number stored in the first hold memory number storage area ( Step S662). Next, the effect control CPU 101 erases one first pending display in the first pending storage display section 9a, shifts the remaining first pending displays after the erased first pending storage one by one, and The display of the first number of pending storages in the 1 pending storage display unit 9a is updated (step S663). For example, when the first to third first pending displays of the first pending storage display unit 9a are lit and displayed, the first pending storage count subtraction designating command is received. (1) While clearing the hold display, shift the first hold display that has been displayed second to the first display area, and the first hold display that has been displayed second to the second display area Shift to

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning combination commands (design designation command, variation category command, and first pending storage number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area. ) Is deleted, and the contents of the first start winning command storage area are shifted (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold memory number subtraction designation command (step S665), the CPU 101 for production control subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold memory number stored in the second hold memory number storage area ( Step S666). Next, the effect control CPU 101 erases one second pending display in the second pending storage display unit 9b, shifts the remaining second pending displays after the erased second pending storage one by one, and The second pending storage number display in the 2 pending storage display unit 9b is updated (step S667). For example, when the first to third second pending displays of the second pending storage display unit 9b are lit and displayed, if the second pending storage number subtraction designation command is received, the first (2) While erasing the hold display, shift the second hold display that was displayed second to the first display area, and display the second hold display that was displayed third the second display area Shift to

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning combination command (design designation command, variation category command, and second pending storage number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the second start winning command storage area. ) Is deleted, and the contents of the second start winning command storage area are shifted (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 selects the background screen of the effect display device 9 according to the normal state (for example, a background screen of blue background color) ) (Step S670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state), an effect mode according to the normal state is displayed by displaying a background screen according to the normal state (hereinafter, referred to as It is controlled to be in the normal effect mode). Next, if it is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation state flag indicating that it is a probability variation state, and the time saving status flag that indicates a time saving status (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is the short time state background designation command (step S 672), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen of the effect display device 9 to correspond to the short time state (for example, a green diagonal line is drawn). It changes to background screen) (step S673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short time state (low probability / high base state), the effect mode according to the short time state is displayed by displaying the background screen according to the short state. (Also referred to as time-saving effect mode). Next, the output control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S 674).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S 675), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen in the effect display device 9 to have a background screen according to the probable variation state (for example, a red diagonal line is drawn) It changes to background screen) (step S676). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state), a background screen according to the positive change state is displayed to display an effect mode according to the positive change state (hereinafter referred to as (Also referred to as a probability variation production mode). Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change state flag (step S677).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S 678). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display of the hold display (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process (step S800A). In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (step S6000). It should be noted that whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress is, for example, not during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (for example, the value of the fluctuation time timer set in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is 0), and the first hold By confirming that there is neither storage nor second pending storage (for example, the first pending storage count and the second pending storage count updated in steps S656, S659, S662, S666 are both 0). It can be determined. If the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the on-hold display control process ends. That is, even if the start prize is newly generated while the customer waiting demonstration is displayed, since the variable display is immediately started and there is almost no time to display the hold display, the process of displaying the hold display after step S6001 is not performed. The process is ended as it is (without displaying the hold display).

  In addition, even during the fluctuation display of the production design, there is neither the 1st reservation memory nor the 2nd reservation memory, the remaining time of the fluctuation display under execution is extremely small and it is just before the end of the fluctuation display (for example, the remainder Even in the case where it is within 1 second), there is virtually no time to display the on-hold display substantially even if a start-up winning anew occurs. The processing may be terminated as it is without displaying the display.

  Also, for example, instead of starting the waiting for customer demonstration display immediately after stopping the variable display of the effect pattern, the waiting for customer demonstration display after a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the end of the last variable display. If it is configured to start, it is a period during which there is no pending storage even during this predetermined period, and the variable display is not being executed, so it is determined as Y in step S6000 and the process is ended as it is. It is also good.

  If the pending display control process is ended by determining Y in step S6000 while the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the pending storage number addition designation command (first pending storage number addition designation command, second pending storage number addition designation) Since the pending indication is not increased even when the command is received, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command, second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is thereafter received. Control is performed not to execute the processing of steps S663 and S667 of the command analysis processing and not to delete the pending display. In this case, for example, when it is determined that Y is determined in steps S655 and S658 of the command analysis processing and a new pending storage count addition designation command is received, it is confirmed whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, If the waiting demonstration is being displayed, a flag indicating that is set, and then, when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received (Y in steps S661 and S665), the flag is set, and step S663 is performed. , S667 may not be executed. Further, in this case, the process of steps S656, S659, S662, and S666 is also skipped instead of skipping only the process of increasing or decreasing the pending display, and the process of increasing or decreasing the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number itself You may choose not to

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and the processing of step S6000 is omitted. Even when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the processing of step S6001 and subsequent steps is executed and a new start prize occurs. The hold display may be displayed. In this case, if the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration is ended, and a new hold display is temporarily displayed by the processing in step S6001 and subsequent steps.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether a new start winning combination has occurred and a command at the time of starting winning combination has been newly received (step S6001). That is, it is confirmed whether a new start winning combination has occurred. Specifically, if a new first hold storage addition designation command or a second hold storage addition designation command is stored in the first start winning prize command storage area or the second start winning prize command storage area shown in FIG. It can be determined that a start winning has newly occurred.

  If the command for the start winning is newly received (Y in step S6001), the effect control CPU 101 displays the hold display corresponding to the variable display based on the new start winning (step S6002). In step S6002, when the first hold storage addition designation command is received, the first hold display is newly displayed, and when the second hold storage addition designation command is received, the first hold display is newly displayed. Display the second hold display.

  FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44), but as shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (the change pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is a chance eye design (for example, "223" or "445" as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8002. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops Determine the combination of the production design that the 3 designs are aligned with the same even design as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols aligned with the same odd symbols.

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. Further, in this embodiment, since the stop display is performed in a state in which the left middle, the right and the left are aligned with the odd symbols when it becomes the definite variation big hit, it is recalled that the odd symbols become the definite variation big hit. The symbol that reminds me of such a big hit is called a odd symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the big hit is normal, the left middle, the right, and the left are evenly displayed with the even symbols, so even symbols are not likely to be a big hit (usually a big hit) . Such a pattern that reminds me of not becoming a definite big hit is called a non-deterministic pattern. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display form of the meter display displayed in the meter display area 90 and the final display form of the active display displayed in the active display area 9F (step S8003). The final display mode indicates what display mode is to be displayed finally after a predetermined change or without a change.

  In step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 performs lottery processing using the meter display final display mode determination table based on the fluctuation pattern, and determines the final display mode of the meter display.

  FIG. 42 (A) is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a meter display final display mode determination table. In the final display mode decision table, the decision items for each fluctuation pattern (“No change”, “first stage”, “second stage”, “third stage”, “fourth stage” and “fifth stage”) ” In the example shown in FIG. 42 (A) to which determination values are respectively assigned, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the meter display final display mode, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42A, the numerical values corresponding to the determination items for each variation pattern indicate the percentage (%) at which each determination item is selected.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the meter display final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (A), the special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (C) or the meter display change presentation mode shown in FIG. Although determination values are actually assigned to the table, the meter display change presentation timing determination table shown in FIG. 44, etc., the ratio of the determination values assigned to simplify the description is shown. In addition, in steps S8006a and S8007 described later where these tables are used, as in step S8003, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining the display change timing, for example, and determines that the extracted random number matches the extracted random number. Determine the item to which the value is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), in this embodiment, the meter display can be displayed by the display mode of the first to fifth stages in addition to the normal mode in which the meter value is not displayed. . For example, when the meter display final display mode is determined to be "no change", the meter value of the meter display does not change. Moreover, when the meter display final display mode is determined to any one of the “first stage” to the “fifth stage”, the meter display is finally changed to the display mode of the first stage to the fifth stage and displayed Do. In this example, the meter display is configured by five scales displayed in the meter display area 9F shown in FIG. The meter display is a mode in which the color of one of the five divisions changes in the display mode of the first stage, and in the mode of the display of the second stage, the color of two scales in five changes. In the display mode of the third stage, the color of three divisions of five is changed, and in the display mode of the fourth stage, the color of four divisions of five is changed, and the display mode of the fifth stage In this case, the colors of all five scales are changed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display changes as the meter display change effect is executed.

  What is characteristic in the meter display final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (A) is that the variation pattern including the super reach is more than the variation pattern not including the super reach, and the display result is a big hit rather than the detachment The determination value is set so that the ratio determined to be other than “no change” is higher if Furthermore, the “second stage” is more than the “first stage”, the “third stage” than the “second stage”, the “fourth stage” than the “third stage”, and the “fourth stage” than the “fourth stage” The determination value is set so that the ratio determined in the “five steps” becomes high. When the display mode of the meter display is changed (that is, the meter display change) than when the display mode of the meter display is not changed (that is, when the meter display change effect is not performed) by having such features The final display mode of the meter display is more “second stage” than “first stage” and “third stage” and “third stage” than “first stage” when presentation is executed. If the "fifth stage" is more than the "fourth stage" or the "fourth stage", the proportion of variation in the advantageous design pattern (for example, developing into super reach) can be increased. The rate at which the display result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the final display mode. Therefore, while being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the display mode of the meter display to change (that is, that the meter display change effect is executed), the display mode is finally displayed by any display mode. Can be noticed.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is configured to change according to the change of the meter display. Therefore, by determining the final display mode of the meter display in step S8003, the final display mode of the active display is also determined. Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display according to the change of the meter display is also referred to as active display change effect.

  FIG. 42 (B) is an explanatory view showing an example of a meter display / active display correspondence table. As shown in FIG. 42B, in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to the “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)” and It can be displayed by being changed to the “third aspect (red)”. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be "first stage" or "second stage", the final display mode of the active display is "first mode ( If the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be "third stage" or "fourth stage", the final display mode of the active display is determined to be "second mode (green)". If the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be the “fifth stage”, the final display mode of the active display is determined to be the “third mode (red)”. When the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be "no change", the final display mode of the active display is determined to be the normal mode (white).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (B), in this embodiment, when the display mode of the meter display changes to the first stage or the second stage, the display mode of the active display changes to the first mode (blue). Change presentation is performed. In addition, when the display mode of the meter display changes to the third or fourth stage, an active display change effect is performed in which the display mode of the active display changes to the second mode (green). Also, when the display mode of the meter display changes to the fifth stage, an active display change effect is performed in which the display mode of the active display changes to the third mode (red). When the display mode of the meter display does not change, the display mode of the active display does not change with the normal mode (white).

  If it is determined in step S8003 that the final display mode of the meter display is "no change" (N in step S8004), that is, if the meter display change presentation (and active display change presentation) is not performed, the process proceeds to step S8008 Do. On the other hand, when the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be other than "no change" (Y in step S8004), that is, when executing the meter display change presentation (and active display presentation), the CPU 101 for effect control Then, it is checked whether or not the final display mode of the meter display is the "fifth stage" (step S8005). Then, when the final display mode of the meter display is the “fifth stage” (Y in step S8005), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the display mode of the special display (step S8006a). On the other hand, when the final display mode of the meter display is not the “fifth stage” (Y in step S8005), the process proceeds to step S8007.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change of the meter display, and further, when the meter display changes to the display mode of the fifth stage, the meter display and the active display are displayed. It is configured to be changed to a special display and may be displayed. For example, in the effect display device 9, a special display (a special display 202 indicating the letter "V" in the example of FIG. 49F) is displayed at the position where the active display area 9F and the meter display area 90 were displayed. Ru. By this configuration, it can be easily recognized that the meter display has changed to the fifth stage (i.e., the highest stage). In addition, in order to make it easy to recognize that the meter display has changed to the fifth stage and that the display mode of the active display has changed to the third mode (red), the meter display for a predetermined period according to the display mode of the fifth stage It is desirable that the display be displayed and the active display be displayed for a predetermined period according to the third aspect (red), and then the meter display and the active display be changed to a special display and displayed.

  In step S8006a, the CPU for effect control 101 performs lottery processing using the special display mode determination table based on the fluctuation pattern, and determines the display mode of the special display. Then, when the change to the special display is performed, that is, when it is determined in step S8006a that the determination item is other than "no change to the special display" (Y in step S8006b), the CPU 101 for effect control changes to the special display. The special display flag indicating that the change of... Is to be performed is set (step S 8006 c).

  FIG. 42 (C) is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a special display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 42 (C), in this embodiment, the special display includes the first special display mode ("heat"), the second special display mode ("super heat") and the third special display mode (" V ") can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the display mode of the special display is determined to be the first special display mode ("Heat"), the special display indicating the character of "Heat" is displayed, and the second special display is displayed. When the display mode ("super heat") is determined, a special display indicating the letters "super heat" is displayed, and when the third special display mode ("V") is determined, the "V A special display indicating the character of "is displayed.

  What is characteristic in the special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (C) is that the “second special display mode”, “the second special display mode”, is more effective than the “first special display mode” when the display result is a big hit rather than the release. The determination value is set so that the proportion determined to be the “third special display mode” is higher than “2 special display mode”. By including such features, the display mode of the special display is "the third special display mode" rather than the "second special display mode" than the "first special display mode". If it is, it is possible to increase the percentage of big hit. That is, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the display mode of the special display. Therefore, it can be noticed about which display mode the special display is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42C, the “third special display mode” is configured to be determined only when the display result is a big hit. That is, when the special display of the third special display mode is displayed, the big hit is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further pay attention to which display mode the special display is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42C, in this embodiment, there may be cases where “no change to special display” is determined as the display mode of the special display. In this case, in the fifth step, It is comprised so that the change from the active display of a meter display and a 3rd aspect to a special display may not be performed. In addition, the jackpot expectation is configured to be higher if it is determined other than "no change to special display" rather than "no change to special display". With this configuration, when the fifth stage meter display and the third mode active display are displayed, attention can be paid to the change to the special display, and an expectation can be given. The present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment. For example, when the meter display changes to the fifth stage (highest stage), it may be changed to the special display.

  In this embodiment, the final display mode of the meter display is determined to be the “fifth stage” only in the case of the fluctuation pattern including the super reach (see FIG. 42A). 42) Although the special display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42C is configured to correspond only to the change pattern including the super reach, the present invention is not limited to this, and a change pattern not including the super reach, The final display mode of the meter display may be determined to be the “fifth stage”, and the special display may be displayed by any display mode.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration example such as the meter display final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 42 (A) or the special display mode decision table shown in FIG. 42 (C). You may do so.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect aspect and an execution timing of the meter display change effect (step S8007).

  In step S8007, the CPU for effect control 101 performs lottery processing using the meter display change effect mode determination table based on the display result, and determines the effect mode of the meter display change effect. Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs lottery processing using the meter display change effect timing determination table based on the display result, and determines the execution timing of the meter display change effect.

  FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (E) are explanatory diagrams showing configuration examples of a meter display change effect mode determination table. In this embodiment, the meter display change effect mode determination table of any of FIGS. 43A to 43E is selected according to the final display mode of the meter display determined in step S8003.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (E), in this embodiment, the meter display change presentation includes the first effect mode (character A appearance), the second effect mode (character B appearance), and the third effect mode. It is executable by (character C appearance). When the effect mode of the meter display change effect is determined to be the first effect mode, the character A appears in the variable display of the effect pattern, and the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed, and the second effect When the mode is determined, the character B appears in the variation display of the production pattern, and the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed, and when the third effect mode is determined, the production pattern During the variable display of the character C, the effect of changing the meter display to the final display mode is executed.

  What is characteristic in the meter display change effect mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43 (A) to (E) is that the “second effect mode” is more effective than the “first effect mode” if the display result is a big hit rather than the release. The judgment value is set such that the proportion determined as the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode”. By providing such a feature, the effect mode of the meter display change effect is “the second effect mode” than the “first effect mode” and the “third effect mode” than the “second effect mode”. The rate at which the display result is a big hit can be made higher. That is, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the effect mode of the meter display change effect. Therefore, it can be made to pay attention as to which effect mode the meter display change effect is executed.

  Moreover, what is characteristic in the meter display change presentation mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43 (A) to (E) is that the final display mode of the meter display is “second stage”, “second stage” than “first stage” If the “fifth stage” is more than the “fifth stage” than the “third stage” than the “third stage” than the “fifth stage”, the effect mode of the meter display change presentation is “fifth The determination value is set such that the proportion determined to be the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode” and the “second effect mode” than the “1 effect mode”. That is, in the meter display after the change, the direction in which the meter display change effect is performed is the "second effect mode" rather than the "first effect mode" and the "third effect mode" rather than the "second effect mode". It is configured such that the degree of expectation of the display mode becomes high (the changing stage becomes large). By configuring in this way, it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the meter display change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the meter display is always changed when the meter display change effect is executed, but the meter display may not be changed even if it is executed. . In this case, for example, although the character appears, an effect is performed in which the character leaves without changing the meter display. In this case, the rate at which the meter display changes may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, in the case of the first effect mode, the meter display may change at a rate of 30%, and in the case of the third effect mode, the meter display may change at a rate of 70%.

  (A) to (E) of FIG. 44 are explanatory views showing an example of the configuration of a meter display change presentation timing determination table. In this embodiment, one of the meter display change presentation timing determination tables of FIGS. 44A to 44E is selected according to the final display mode of the meter display determined in step S8003.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (A) to 44 (E), in this embodiment, the meter display change presentation includes the first timing (immediately after the start of fluctuation), the second timing (before reaching reach), and the third timing (reach reaching). It is feasible in the later). The present invention is not limited to the timing shown in this embodiment, and may be performed at any timing, such as every pseudo continuous fluctuation. Further, the present invention may be performed during a big hit game as well as during variable display. In this case, it may be suggested that the display mode of the meter display or the active display may be controlled to a gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a probability changing state) advantageous after the round extension of the big hit game or the big hit game. Good.

  What is characteristic in the meter display change presentation timing determination table shown in FIGS. 44 (A) to (E) is that the “second timing” is more important than the “first timing” if the display result is a big hit rather than an off The determination value is set so that the proportion determined as the “third timing” is higher than the “second timing”. By having such a feature, the display timing of the meter display change effect is displayed when the “second timing” is more than the “first timing” and the “third timing” is more than the “second timing”. The rate at which the result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the big hit expectation can be made different depending on the execution timing of the meter display change presentation. Therefore, it can be noticed about at which timing the meter display change presentation is performed.

  Moreover, what is characteristic in the meter display change presentation timing determination table shown in FIGS. 44 (A) to (E) is that the final display mode of the meter display is “second stage”, “second stage” than “first stage” If the “fifth stage” is more than the “third stage” than the “third stage” than the “third stage”, the execution timing of the meter display change effect is “third” if the “fifth stage” is more than the “fourth stage” The determination value is set such that the ratio at which the “third timing” is determined is higher than the “second timing” than the “first timing”. That is, when the execution timing of the meter display change presentation is “the third timing” rather than the “second timing” than the “first timing”, the expectation of the display form of the meter display after the change is expected It is configured to have a higher degree (more stages of change). With this configuration as well, it can be noticed at which execution timing the meter display change presentation is performed. In addition, when it comprises so that meter display may not change, even if meter display change presentation is performed, according to execution timing, you may make it the ratio in which meter display changes differ. For example, in the case of the first timing, the meter display may change at a rate of 30%, and in the case of the third timing, the meter display may change at a rate of 70%.

  In this embodiment, each of the meter display change presentation mode determination tables shown in FIG. 43 and each of the meter display change presentation timing determination tables shown in FIG. 44 has any one of the determination items according to the display result (loss or big hit) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be determined according to the variation pattern or the jackpot type.

  Moreover, although it is set as the structure which can perform meter display change production | presentation once during the fluctuation | variation display of production | presentation symbol in this embodiment, it is good also as a structure which can be performed in multiple times. By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the effect pattern (the first timing), the first meter display change presentation is executed and the meter display changes to the first stage, and the active display change presentation is The active display changes to the first mode, and before the reach is established (second timing), the second meter display change effect is executed and the meter display changes to the second stage, and after the reach is established (third At timing (3), the third meter display change presentation is performed to change the meter display to the third stage, and the active display change presentation is performed to perform control to change the active display to the second mode.

  Moreover, when making meter display change presentation possible several times, you may make it a production | presentation aspect differ for every execution timing. For example, immediately after the start of variation of the production design (first timing), the first meter display change presentation is executed by the first presentation mode, and after reaching (the third timing), the second meter display change presentation is It may be made to be performed by 2 presentation modes.

  When the effect mode and the execution timing of the meter display change presentation are determined in step S8007, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the contents of the fluctuation pattern and the meter display change presentation (step S8009). If it is determined in step S8004 that there is no change in meter display, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step S8008). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8008 or step S8009 is started (step S8010).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen (including the active display) of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. In addition, CPU101 for production | presentation control selects the process table corresponding to the production | presentation to perform, when it is decided to perform production | presentation, such as meter display change production | presentation. For example, even if the variation patterns are the same, the control contents of the rendering device are different depending on whether the meter display change presentation is performed or not. Therefore, the corresponding process tables are selected. Further, in this embodiment, different process tables are selected according to the presentation mode and execution timing of the meter display change presentation.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8007). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8008).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays an active display in the active display area 9F (step S8009a). In this embodiment, the active indication is displayed in the same manner as the first pending indication or the second pending indication. In addition, when it is set as the structure which can perform the production | presentation which changes the display mode of a pending | holding display, and the pending | hold display corresponding to the change display to start is displayed by the display mode different from a normal mode, the active display by the display mode Display Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display) .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8010).

  The present invention is not limited to the example described in this embodiment, and for example, a step-up notice effect, a mini character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect wing effect notice effect, a blackout effect, etc. It is also possible to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the determination result.

  FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether it is a timing immediately before the meter display change effect starts (step S8106). Whether or not it is the timing immediately before the meter display change presentation is started can be confirmed by the contents of the process data. It is desirable that the timing immediately before the meter display change presentation is started can secure a period for executing a notification presentation described later before the meter display change presentation is started.

  Note that display control for causing the character to appear in the display area of the effect display device 9 and changing the display mode of the meter display by the meter display change presentation is realized by executing the processing of step S8105.

  If it is the timing immediately before the meter display change presentation is started, the CPU for effect control 101 executes a notification presentation that reports that the meter display change presentation is started (step S8107). In this embodiment, an effect of causing the meter display area 90 to blink is executed as a notification effect (see FIG. 48 (B)). The present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the presence or absence of the notification effect may be determined by lottery, and may or may not be performed. In addition, the degree of advantage (for example, the rate at which the meter display change presentation is performed in a presentation mode with a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation, and the case where the notification presentation is performed and the meter display change presentation is performed without being executed) The rate of change to a high display mode, the rate of becoming a big hit) may be made different.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether the display mode of the active display corresponds to the display mode of the meter display (step S8108), and if it does not correspond, the display mode of the active display is a display of the meter display The display mode is changed to the mode corresponding to the mode (step S8109). That is, when the process of step S8105 is executed, the meter display change effect is performed, the display mode of the meter display changes, and the display mode of the active display does not correspond, as shown in FIG. Based on the contents of the meter display / active display correspondence table shown, an active display change effect to change the display mode of the active display is executed. For example, when the display mode of the meter display is the “third stage” and the display mode of the active display is the normal mode (white), the active display in which the display mode of the active display is changed to the second mode (green) Execute change presentation.

  In order to make it easy to understand that the display mode of the active display changes in response to the change of the display mode of the meter display, the change of the display mode of the meter display and the change of the display mode of the active display are simultaneously performed. Instead of changing the display mode of the meter display, the display mode of the active display may be changed when a predetermined period elapses.

  Then, if the display mode of the meter display is the fifth step (Y in step S8110a) and the special display flag is set (step S8110b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the meter display and the active display to special Control for changing to display and displaying is performed (step S8111). That is, by the execution of the process of step S8105, the meter display change presentation is performed, the display mode of the meter display changes to the fifth step, and the process of step S8109 is executed to display the active display mode. When it is determined to change to the third mode and to change to the special display, the meter display and the active display are erased, and control to display the special display is performed. Further, in step S8111, the special display is displayed by any one of the first special display mode to the third special display mode determined in step S8006a of the effect symbol variation start process.

  In order to make it easy to understand that the special display is displayed in response to the display mode of the meter display changing to the fifth stage and the display mode of the active display changing to the third mode, the meter display and the active display After the display mode of the display changes, the special display may be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a period in which an expectation can be held, paying attention to whether or not the special display is displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the special display is displayed, the meter display and the active display are configured to be changed to the special display by performing control to erase the meter display and the active display. When displaying a display, by performing control which erase | eliminates either a meter display or an active display, you may be comprised so that either a meter display or an active display may be changed into a special display. Further, the special display may be additionally displayed without erasing the meter display and the active display.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8112), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8113).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8108 to S8109, the display mode of the active display is changed according to the change of the meter display. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the active display is changed by the meter display change presentation, so that the change of the display mode of the active display can be prevented from being monotonous, and the interest can be improved. it can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S8106 to S8107, the notification effect is performed immediately before the meter display change effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the change of the meter display.

  FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 erases the active display of the active display area 9F (step S8300). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been performed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the processing ends. If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b), and controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (disappeared symbol, big hit symbol). The operation is performed (step S8302). When neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. Check whether the big hit start designated command reception flag indicating that it is received or the small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command received flag which indicates that the small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command is received (step S8305) . When the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designated command reception flag is set, CPU101 for production control resets the stop design indicatory flag (step S8306), according to fanfare production A process table is selected (step S8307). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1 and movable member control data 1), the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speakers 27 as effect component, and movable member 78 as effect component and effect Control of the blade combination members 79a, 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 39, the fluctuation pattern) If the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both of the effect control process processing and the fourth symbol process processing, as shown in this embodiment, at the time of the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset at the time of, or at the time of the big hit end, in the big hit end effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  Next, specific examples of the meter display change presentation and the active display change presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example of FIG. 48, the meter display change presentation is executed in the first effect mode, and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the display mode of the first stage, and the active display is in the first mode according to the change of the meter display. A changing active display change presentation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the effect display device 9, when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 48A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), immediately before the meter display change presentation is started, a notification presentation that blinks and displays the meter display 90 is executed. Then, when the meter display change effect of the first effect mode is started, the character A 201a appears (FIG. 48C), and the display mode of the meter display changes the color of one of the five scales. It changes to the display mode of the stage (FIG. 48 (D)). Thereafter, in response to the change of the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. E)).

  In the example of FIG. 49, the meter display change effect is executed in the third effect mode, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the display mode of the fifth stage, and the active display changes to the third mode according to the change in the meter display And the meter display and the active display change to the special display of the third special display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the effect display device 9, when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 49A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), immediately before the meter display change presentation is started, a notification presentation that blinks the meter display 90 is executed. Then, when the meter display change effect of the third effect mode is started, the character C201c appears (FIG. 49C), and the display mode of the meter display changes the color of all the scales of the fifth. It changes to the display mode of the stage (FIG. 49 (D)). Also, in response to a change in meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the third mode (in the example of FIG. 49E, the color is indicated by characters) and displayed (FIG. E)).

  Then, the meter display and the active display are changed to the special display of the third special display mode (the special display 202 indicating the letter "V") and displayed (Fig. 49 (F)). Thereafter, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 49 (G)).

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed according to the change of the meter display, but for example, the display mode of any of the pending display is changed according to the change of the meter display It may be configured to In this case, based on the command at the time of start winning, it is realized by correlating and executing the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the meter display change effect. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the start winning combination, and the effect is executed based on the determination result. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the display mode of any of the pending display changes in response to the meter display, the meter display change effect is produced in the period from the time when the pending display is displayed until the corresponding variable display starts May be executable.

  Further, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is changeable by the pre-reading effect, and the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed by a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode is active by the display mode. The display may be displayed. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display) . Also, in this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the meter display, and the active display which has taken over the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the further meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on the command at the start winning at the start winning, or may be determined in the effect symbol variation start process It is also good. Further, in this case, the meter display change presentation may be performed in a period from the point when the hold display is displayed to the end of the corresponding variable display.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific display means (for example, the active display area 9F or the first hold storage) capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the active display or the hold display) corresponding to the variable display A display unit 9a, a second hold storage display unit 9b), and a state change display means (for example, a meter display area 90) capable of displaying a state change display (for example, meter display) which can change in stages The display means can display the specific display by a plurality of types of display modes (for example, the first to third modes) having different degrees of expectation, and among the plurality of types of display modes according to the display stage of the state change display. The specific display is displayed by changing to any display mode (see the meter display / active display correspondence table shown in FIG. 42 (B)). Therefore, it can prevent that the change of the display mode of a specific display becomes monotonous, and can improve interest.

  Although this embodiment has been described using the meter display 90 as an example of the state change display, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the state change display may be realized by an image simulating a measuring instrument such as a tachometer. Further, the state change display may be realized by an arbitrary image such as a character, a clock, a graph, a numerical display, or the like as long as it can be changed stepwise as well as an image imitating a measuring instrument.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the display step of the state change display changes, it is configured to be provided with notification effect execution means for executing the notification effect. Therefore, attention can be paid to the state change display.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the specific display is displayed in the same display mode, the degree of expectation is configured to be different according to the display stage of the state change display (for example, FIG. As shown in (A) and (B), even if the display mode of the active display is the same as the first mode, the expectation is higher in the second stage than in the first stage of the meter display) . Therefore, in addition to the display mode of the specific display, attention can be paid to the display stage of the state change display. In addition, if the display stage of the state change display can be changed a plurality of times, it is expected that the display stage of the state change display changes even after the display mode of the specific display changes. Can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the special effect execution means capable of executing the special effect (for example, the meter display change effect) for changing the display stage of the state change display is provided, and the special effect execution means For example, the special effect can be executed in any of the first to third effect modes), and the state change display is displayed according to which effect mode is executed. The rate at which the stages change is different (see the meter display change presentation mode determination table shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E). Therefore, attention can be paid to the effect mode of the special effect, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the state change display changes to the specific stage (for example, the fifth stage), the state change display means changes the state change display to the specific mode (for example, the special display) and displays Is configured. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that the state change display has changed to the specific stage.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the state change display means can display the state change display in a plurality of types of specific aspects (for example, the special display of the first to third special display aspects), and the plurality of types of specific aspects , It is comprised so that the specific mode (for example, the special display of the 3rd special display mode) which alert | reports that it is decided to be controlled by an advantageous state is included. Therefore, in addition to the state change display changing to the specific mode, it is possible to pay attention to which of the plural types of specific modes to change, and the interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the active display is displayed in the same manner as the first hold display or the second hold display, but the active display is performed in a mode in which a part is in common with the first hold display or the second hold display. It may be displayed. For example, the active display may be displayed in a mode in which the shape or part of the pattern is the same as the first hold display or the second hold display but different in color or size, or the shape or color is the same as the first hold display or the second hold display. In the same manner, the active display may be displayed in a manner different in operation.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the second embodiment, a battle effect is executed as a super reach effect, and a battle command effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes at the start of the super reach effect, thereby suggesting a big hit expectation, a probability change expectation, etc. Is configured as. In addition, it is configured to have relevance between the display at the time of battle command display as battle command effect (for example, the characters "Win battle!" Are displayed) and the active display.

  For example, in the production symbol fluctuation start process, when it is a fluctuation pattern including super reach, depending on the display result (loss or big hit) and the display mode of the active display at the start of the super reach production, display during battle command It may be determined whether or not to display according to the aspect of.

  FIG. 50 shows a configuration example of a battle instruction display color determination table. In the example shown in FIG. 50, the determination ratio of the display color at the time of the battle command is different depending on the display result and the display mode of the active display. Note that the display mode of the active display is the display mode when the reach effect in the super reach is started. In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display can be changed by executing the active display change effect after the variable display of the effect design is started. Therefore, while the reach effect in the super reach is being executed, the active display change effect is not executed, and the display mode of the active display is set to be unchangeable, based on the timing when the reach effect in the super reach is started By determining the battle instruction display color at a different ratio according to the display mode of the active display, the player can easily recognize the relevance between the active display and the battle instruction display color.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display result is “off”, the determination ratio of “blue” at the time of the battle command is highest regardless of the display mode of the active display, “green”, “green” The decision ratio decreases in the order of “red”. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", regardless of the display mode of the active display, the determination ratio of "red" at the time of the battle command is the highest, and "green" and "blue" The decision rate goes down in order. Therefore, when the battle instruction display color is "red", the display result is more likely to be "big hit" than when it is other than "red" such as "green" or "blue". As described above, the battle command is a suggestion effect that suggests that the display result will be a "big hit" at different rates according to the display color.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, even when the same display result is obtained, the ratio at which “red” is selected (decided) as the display color at the time of battle instruction may differ according to the display mode of the active display is there. For example, in the case where the display mode of the active display is "red" among the cases where the display result is "off", the ratio of determining the battle display color to "red" is 1%. On the other hand, when the display mode of the active display is the display mode of "blue" or "green" among the cases where the display result is "off", the battle command display color is determined to be "red". The percentage is 10%. Therefore, when the display mode of the active display is "red" among the cases where the display result is "off", compared with the case where the display mode of the active display is "blue" or "green". The rate at which "red" is selected as the display color at the time of battle instruction is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display mode of the active display is "red" among the cases where the display result is "big hit", the display mode of the active display is "blue" or "green" As compared with the case of the display mode, the ratio of selecting “red” as the display color at the time of battle instruction becomes higher.

  In this embodiment, the display mode with the highest degree of expectation in the active display is the third mode "red". Further, in the effect mode with the highest degree of expectation in the battle command effect which is the suggested effect, the display color is "red". And the selection ratio of the production | presentation aspect of battle instruction | command is set so that it may differ according to whether the active display is 3rd aspect "red" during execution of the reach production | presentation in super reach. If the display mode of the active display is the third mode "red", the percentage at which the display color at the time of battle command is determined to be "red" as the effect mode of the battle command when the display result is "off" ) Is lower than the proportion (10%) determined when the display aspect is other than the third aspect “red”, and the proportion at which the display color at the time of battle instruction is determined to the display color other than “red” (for example, While 69% of “blue” is higher than the percentage determined when the display mode is other than the third mode “red” (eg 60% of “blue”), the display result is “big hit” When it is, the proportion (85%) in which the display color at the battle command is determined to be “red” as the effect form of the battle command is a proportion determined when the display form other than the third form “red” ( It becomes higher than 70%), and the display color at the time of battle command is decided to the display color other than "red" Is the percentage (e.g., 5% of the "blue") is is lower than the ratio which is determined when the third aspect "red" non-display mode (for example, 10% of the "blue").

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the display result is “off”, the ratio at which the display color at the battle command is determined to be “green” is the common ratio (30% regardless of the display mode of the active display) ). Thus, among the display colors at the time of battle command as the effect mode of the battle command, those having a common selection ratio may be included regardless of which display mode the active display is displayed.

  As described above, by making the display at the battle command time as the battle command effect and the display mode of the active display have relevance, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific effect means capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect) during the execution of the variable display, and the suggestion suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state It is equipped with the suggestion effect means which can perform production (for example, battle command production) during execution of specific production. The specific display means can display, as the specific display, a corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Further, the suggestive effect means can execute the suggestive effect according to any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes (for example, the display at the time of the battle command displayed in blue, green or red). And according to whether the correspondence display is displayed by the specific display mode during execution of the specific effect, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the suggestion effect is configured to be different (the active display shown in FIG. 50 is Please refer to the case where "display color at battle command" becomes "red" when displayed in the third mode).

  In addition, about the structure shown to said each embodiment, only any one structure may be applied to a game machine, and combining the structure of one part or all of each said embodiment. You may apply to a game machine.

  The configuration shown in the above embodiment can be applied to a gaming system called a so-called portable interlocking system. In general, a gaming system called a mobile interlocking system is a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined benefit for the player based on predetermined information output by the gaming machine. And a privilege giving device for performing a process of giving.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine plays predetermined conditions such as the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of so-called consecutive villas (the number of big hits in a definite change state ongoing), and the number of mission achievements. It accumulates as a history and displays a two-dimensional code etc. as predetermined information at the end of the game. In addition, the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function, and transmits it to a Web server (a privilege giving device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of providing a predetermined benefit according to the game history. For example, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's portable terminal as a predetermined benefit, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's portable terminal, and the player next time When playing a game, processing is performed to enable customization of the display screen of the gaming machine according to the preference of the player.

  When the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a game system as described above, for example, it is determined that the display change effect is executed and a big hit is the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the number of times is a web server. It may be managed as a game history. Then, in accordance with the number of times the display change effect is executed and the big hit is made, digital content may be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine may be customized.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence 1 Although one variation pattern command is transmitted, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the rendering device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, FIG. 4). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is such an aspect Not limited. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to be a big hit, and determines when winning the variation pattern type (prefetching determination), and indicates the result of the winning determination (design designation command) In the case of transmitting the change category command) and performing the advance notice announcement effect based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example The winning determination (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiments and the modifications described later may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiments disclosed this time and the embodiments described below are illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine), and variable display (e.g., first special symbol) And 2nd special symbol, variable display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 101, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 9, image display device 905, game control microcomputer 560, game control) for performing variable display of effect symbols For the microcomputer 90100, the first special symbol display 8a, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol display device 904B), and the specific display (for example, active) corresponding to the variable display Specific display means (for example, active display area 9F, active display area AHA, 1 Hold storage display unit 9a, first start winning storage display area 905HL, second reserve storage display unit 9b, second start winning storage display area 905HR), and state change display (for example, meter display) that can change in stages State effect display means (for example, meter display area 90) capable of displaying and specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, speech preview) during execution of variable display Device 905, step S90726 of FIG. 69), and the first selection effect (for example, character lottery effect, see FIG. 70B) for the first type of the specific effect (for example, the type of the character of the speech preview). The first selection effect execution means capable of executing (for example, the effect control CPU 90120, the image display device 905, step S90722 in FIG. 69) And a second selection effect (for example, character color lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (C)) for the second type of the specific effect (for example, the speech balloon and the character color) 2 selection effect executing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90724 in FIG. 69), the specific display means has a plurality of types of display modes (for example, first to The specific display can be displayed by the three modes), and the specific display can be displayed by changing to any one of a plurality of display modes according to the display step of the state change display (for example, , A portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8108 and S8109 (refer to the meter display / active display correspondence table shown in FIG. 42 (B)) The specific effect execution means corresponds to an aspect corresponding to a combination of the effect result of the first selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect (for example, the character of the selected type and the color aspect of the balloon and the characters A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect (see, for example, FIG. 70 (D)) of the aspect in which the above are combined) can be performed.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the change of the display mode of the specific display from being monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, since the player can be made to pay attention to a plurality of selection effects and their effects as well as the specific effects, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. In particular, if a certain relationship is provided between the change in the display mode of the specific display and the selected effects and the effects of those effects, the specific effect and the specific effect can be prevented while preventing the change in the display mode of the specific display from being monotonous. Since the player's attention can be drawn to both of the selection effects, the interest of the game can be further improved. For example, when a certain effect is executed among the specific effects such as the announcement of the speech, if the display stage of the state change display such as the meter display rises corresponding to the specific effect, the display mode of the specific display changes. Since the player's attention can be drawn to both the specific effect and the selection effect, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, when specific effects such as speech notices and effects to change the display mode of specific displays such as active display are performed according to the display step of state change display such as meter display, the process is executed simultaneously. Alternatively, one may be performed and the other may be performed. In addition, the special effect is executed during one variable display from the point of paying attention to the effect to be performed by suppressing the dispersion of the player's attention, and the specific display is performed according to the display step of the state change display. The effect of changing the display mode may not be performed, or during one variable display, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display may be performed according to the display step of the state change display, and the specific effect may not be performed. Good.

  Furthermore, in a mode corresponding to the combination of the rendering result of the first selection effect on the type of the serif notice character and the rendering result of the second selection effect on the mode of the balloon and character color etc. The following other embodiments are mentioned as a game machine which can be executed.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 51 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning hole It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter.

  The gaming ball having passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. In addition, the prize by the gaming ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A is referred to as "first starting winning". In addition, the winning due to the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B is referred to as a "second starting winning".

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are detected based on the fact that the game balls having passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 9022A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning) Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special symbol game executed on the first special symbol display device 904A if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as (described later) or variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 is satisfied. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls that have passed (enter) the second start winning opening are detected based on the second start opening switch 9022 B (based on the occurrence of the second start winning) The second special symbol display device 904B executes the second special symbol display device if the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a graphic game (described later) or variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 905 is established. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start When the first start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) And when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start When the second start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) And when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning opening". Further, when the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning combination". Further, the number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the number of first special figure holding storage, the number of second special drawing holding storage, and the total number of holding storage are not distinguished from each other, it is usually simply referred to as "special drawing holding number of storage". When it is referred to as “the number of storages”, it may refer to any one or two of the number of first special view pending storages, the number of second special view pending storages, and the total number of pending storages. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 902 (below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B). The special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 52, and the specific area changing to the open state and the closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the large winning opening I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is on, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning winning ball device 907, the gaming ball is moving other winning openings, such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the large winning hole, A second condition that is disadvantageous to the

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special images") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special figure", and the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B is " It is also called "second special view". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a "variable display game". In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a "first special view game", and a variable executed by the second special symbol display device 904B The display game (a variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a "second special view game". Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game". The first special symbol display device 904A (same for the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 902 (the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) . The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of first special view game holds) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible.

  On the left side portion of the game area in the game board 902, a pass gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a general drawing reserve display 9025C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, a gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. If the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 The common drawing start condition for executing the common drawing game to be executed in the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 9020 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc. in the same manner as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol.

  The common drawing hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game that is in the execution waiting state. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative design) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 905 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 51, in the display area of the image display device 905, decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C and 9055R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. In response to the start of any one of the first special view game or the second special view game, ie, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any of the first special view or the second special view Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, the decorative symbol (“decided decorative symbol”) to be the variable display result in each of the decorative symbol display areas , Also referred to as "final stop symbol") is displayed stopped. That is, in the display area (the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R) of the image display device 905, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the first special view game (or the second special view game). The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as the "final stop symbol") is displayed in a stopped state.

  The decorative design may be, for example, eight kinds of design (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images. The character image may be, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or any other arbitrary figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to each alphanumeric character indicating “1” to “8”. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  In addition, the fixed display which is the stop display of the finalized special symbol which is the fixed display which is the variable display result of special symbol (also referred to as the special display display result) and which ends the variable display, the fixed display which is the variable display result of decoration Stop display to stop the variable display and to display the fixed display which stops the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal pattern which is the variable display result of the normal design (also referred to as common drawing display result) Also referred to as a complete stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derived indication (or simply "derived"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol The fluctuation time should be settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the determined ornament symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Moreover, you may perform stop display different from complete stop display (final stop display, derivation | leading-out display). For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0", for example, is displayed while causing slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc., or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, a first start winning combination storage display area 905HL and a second start winning combination storage display area 905HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, similarly to the first suspension indicator 9025A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, as in the second suspension display 9025B, a second suspension display is performed to display the second special view suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 905HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 905HL (center side of the display area of image display device 905) as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special view hold information, and the first start winning storage display area 905HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 905HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 905HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed by left-justifying. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 905HR (center side of the display area of the image display device 905) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and a second start prize storage display area 905HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) A display may be added.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display, which has been displayed since the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 905HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning storage display area 905HL and the second start winning storage display area 905HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 5H".

  In addition to the first start winning storage display area 905HL and the second starting winning storage display area 905HR, the display area of the image display device 905 is a first start winning storage display area 905HL and a second as a pending display area. Hold display erased (moved) from the start winning a prize storage display area 905HR (that is, first special view reserve information digested by establishment of the first start condition, and second digested by the establishment of the second start condition Display a special image representing information including active display (also referred to as "digestion display", "display this time", etc.) according to the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the special view storage information Active display area AHA ("digestion display area", "digestion display area", "present hold display area", "present hold display area", "active hold display Area, "active reserve display area", "active display area", "this time display area", "this time display area", "time display area", etc. Between 905 HL and the second start winning combination display area 905 HR is arranged.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 905HL and the second starting winning storage display area 905HR. The display area AHA may be disposed at any position in the display area of the image display device 905. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display or around the active display frame. The information corresponding to is displayed by the special image.

  In the game area of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game balls entering any of the general winning openings are detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. An upper plate (ball hitting supply plate) and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is put on when the player holds the operating rod). There is.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031 A) on the front side of the upper surface It is provided.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the speakers 908UL and 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speakers 908LL and 908LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "speakers 908". The speaker 908 outputs (reproduces) sound (sound and voice).

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game.

  Inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 903 are provided light emitting members (light emitters) that emit light as effects or decorations. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the light emitting member 909 CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 905, the light emitting member 909 CL and the light emitting member 909 CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 905 A light emitting member 909 SL and a light emitting member 909 SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903 U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR will be collectively referred to as "lamps 909" unless otherwise specified.

  Although the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, etc. described above are effect devices that execute effects, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with other effect devices such as effect models having drive units as effect devices. It is also good.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a special drawing game (first special drawing game) by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the establishment of the second starting condition after the starting condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 has a predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is put into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 907 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like).

  Among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 907 a first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open It is also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 907 in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that will be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "7" are normally open round big hit symbols, and the numbers of "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (usually open big hit state) as a normal opening round specified gaming state which is controlled after the normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning prize ball device 907 The big winning opening is opened in a period until the door passes a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period, or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. By doing this, a round is performed to change the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In addition, a normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specified gaming state.

  In the jackpot gaming state (short-term opening jackpot state) as a short-term opening round specific gaming state controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 907 The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period when the large winning opening is opened by the large winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit For one second).

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball is won in the large winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (eg, 0.1 second), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot gaming state in which the balls (prize balls) can not be obtained substantially. In addition, the short-term opening big hit state is also referred to as "the second specified gaming state".

  After the special symbol indicating the small hit symbol "2" is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning action is performed to change the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to the first state (opened state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that has not been stopped yet is displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Also, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 908, the light emission operation such as the lamp 909 (lighting operation, blinking operation, light off operation) An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in this embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high hit probability compared to the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) It is calculated by the probability that the effect is executed other than time) × (probability of not being a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like which is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. In the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) are made after the decorative symbol is changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, and then a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left") is displayed among the decorative symbol display areas displayed temporarily. By displaying the stop pattern after changing the decoration pattern again in either or both of the 905L and the “right” decoration pattern display area 905R, effect display for changing the decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of decorative symbols after variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the finalized decorative symbols as variable display results are derived and displayed. There are times when the variable display state of the decorative symbol changes to the reach state by executing the display again, and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-series effect, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being met once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started All of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are displayed with decorative symbols (for example, a predetermined pseudo chance sequence etc. are displayed before the symbol is derived and displayed. Or temporarily displayed on all, and then, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, re-variable display, which is an effect display to start variable display of all decorative symbols, is predetermined. It can be done once (eg up to 4 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo-series effect is variable display until all the decorative patterns in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are temporarily stopped (initial variable The number of times of display) (one time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decoration patterns have been temporarily stopped last (1 time), and re-change between the first variable display and the last variable display The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding up. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number of times that all decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R (number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as "the first pseudo run", and the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is the "second pseudo run". The third variable display (the second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as "the third pseudo-run", and the fourth variable display (the third re-variable display) to the fourth The first temporary stop display is also referred to as "the fourth pseudo run". Moreover, the number of times of pseudo run in the pseudo run effect is also referred to as "the number of times of pseudo run fluctuation (or the number of pseudo run)". That is, the number of times of pseudo continuous change, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. Note that the increase in the number of times of the pseudo run, such as the first time, the second time, the third time, and so on, is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row.

  In addition, the pseudo-series effect, before reaching the reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R any part or all of the decorative symbol display area temporary display of false chance display As described above, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R may be temporarily stopped temporarily, or after reaching is reached, any of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are temporarily stopped and displayed. In other words, the effect mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect includes at least the effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before reaching the reach state, and the effect mode in which the chance symbol is displayed temporarily stop after the reach state. May be

  The slip effect (as well as the pseudo effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the big hit expectation is high. May be Hereinafter, a case is sometimes referred to collectively as "notice effect" in which the player is notified or suggested that any reach effect or certain reach effect may be executed, or that the jackpot expectation is high. is there. The advance notice may include a variable display operation different from the slip effect and the pseudo effect, in addition to the slip effect and the pseudo effect, for example, the display of the background image and the display of the message window. Some may use a rendering operation different from the variable display production, such as hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like.

  In this embodiment, when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the change is changed as the advance notice effect, the display mode of the special image is not changed. Includes common renditions to be performed. Further, the advance notice includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after the common effect is performed, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after the common effect is performed.

  Note that the preliminary presentation effect may include a suggested production that suggests a common effect. Further, the suggested effect may be an effect that is commonly performed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, as in the common effect. In other words, when the effect that suggests that the common effect is to be performed is referred to as “indication effect”, and the effect that indicates that either the successful effect or the failure effect is performed (common effect or common effect There is a case where it is called "indication effect".

  It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the contents of the advance notice or the notice suggested by the advance notice effect are realized (actually confirmed). For example, the notice effect that indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reaching state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of the game ball It may be something which is executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or non reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result by the winning of a certain game ball will be a "big hit" is that at least the finalized decoration symbol by the winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. Also may be executed (started) before.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading advance notice effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the first pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as the first pending display of the target, and the pending information of the target is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display for the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the target is also referred to as the variable display for the target. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  After the winning of the game ball (after the establishment of the start condition), the player performs whether or not the content for giving notice of the advance notice effect of the prefetch notice is realized. It is sufficient if it is executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, the rendering operation serving as a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the winning of a certain gaming ball is at least the decorative symbol by the winning of the gaming ball The variable display state may be performed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least for the rendering operation of the gaming ball, there is a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" by the winning of a certain game ball. The finalized decorative design by winning may be performed (started) before it is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (predetermination notice effect), for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning memory display area 905HL, or An action effect such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (predetermination notice effect), for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 905HR, or An action effect such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in special drawing games, when the normal big hit symbols such as the special symbols showing the number “3” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is performed, etc., a determined decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") among a plurality of types of big hit combinations The symbol is displayed stopped. The predetermined normal big hit combination is, for example, the same kind of normal symbol (also referred to as "non-probable symbol") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a combination to display the final stop. An example of a normal symbol is an even-numbered symbol number "2", "4", "6", "8" among four kinds of decorative symbols "1" to "8". It is.

  In response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game usually becoming a big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is usually stopped is displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. A variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "non-probability change" (also referred to as a "usually big hit") when the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to. Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-deterministic change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed.

  By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g., initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is met first between the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result becoming a "big hit". When it is done, you should finish.

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in the special drawing game, when the probability variation big hit symbols such as the special symbols indicating the number “7” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to reaching the reach state, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed, etc. The finalized decorative design may be stopped and displayed. In other words, in the special figure game, when the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed in the final stop, the decoration symbol in the predetermined probability variation big hit combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol in the predetermined regular big hit combination is stopped display There are cases where The predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same kind of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and the final stop is displayed. An example of the odd variation design is an ornament pattern having an odd number “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” among eight kinds of symbol designs “1” to “8”. It is.

  Regardless of whether the finalized decoration design is usually a big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the positive variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “probability change” in a case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probable change", it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, time variation control and probability change control (probable change control) are performed. By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result (special view display result) becomes a "big hit" in the special view game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability change control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state is controlled again is satisfied.

  As in the case of the time saving control, the probability change control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability change control is ended when it is determined that the probability change control is to be ended in the probability change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, even if the probability change control is ended. Good.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the variation time (normal figure variation time) of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 9020 than in the normal state, or the variation of the normal symbol in each regular drawing game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per common view" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as "time saving state" or "high base state". In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a "probability state" or "high probability state". The gaming state in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as "high probability high base state". A positive change state in which only the positive change control is performed and the short time control and the high open control are not performed is also referred to as a “high positive low base state”. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which time saving control and high open control are performed together with probability variation control may be referred to as "probability state", and to distinguish it from high probability low base status, "time reduction with probability variation state" is there. On the other hand, in order to distinguish from the high probability high base state, the positive variable state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and short time control and high open control are not performed is also referred to as "time short non probability change state" is there. The short time state in which the time reduction control or the high release control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a “low probability high base state”. The normal state in which neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a “low probability low base state”. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game is "big hit" is enhanced, which is advantageous for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state is also referred to as a "special game state".

  When the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a finalized special symbol in a special drawing game, and the small hitting symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number “2” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of combinations of a plurality of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the short-term opening round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After, for example, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various finalized decorative symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the short-term opening round big hit symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of a "probable" (also referred to as a "probable big hit" or "a sudden big change big hit"). Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the "big hit" of "probable", it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state, and after that end, it is sufficient to perform probability change control together with time saving control.

  The small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed as a final symbol in the special drawing game, and the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the "small hit". After the end, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result is "small hit". However, when the special view game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of times the special view game has been executed in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit gaming state ends, The special gaming state may end and be in the normal state.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol that the finalized decorative symbol becomes the non-probable variation big hit combination or the positive variation big hit combination, the re-lottery effect may be executed. For example, as a re-lottery effect, after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern that usually makes a big hit combination in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, it is changed again with the same decorative pattern aligned, One of the decorative symbol (probable variation symbol) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) which is usually a big hit combination may be displayed as the finalized decorative symbol at the final stop.

  Usually, after the determined decoration symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round at the start of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state, the next round starts after any round is finished in the big hit gaming state During the period until the final round in the big hit gaming state, the period until the next variable display game is started, etc., the jackpot becoming a definite change notification effect of whether to control to a definite change state or not A promotion effect may be performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion".

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011 as shown in FIG. 52, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special figure or the second special figure. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speaker 908 and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for presentation such as 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 is an electrical component for effect such as a display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of an audio output operation from the speaker 908, all or part of lighting / extinguishing operation in the lamp 909 or the like It has a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, causes the speaker 908 to output sound. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the light on / off drive in the lamp 909 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the main substrate 9011 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a "sensor" It is sufficient if it has.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 53 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 53A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the start of fluctuation in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 53B, for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” or the determination result of the big hit type. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for specifying the final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating a current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal open big hit state or short open open big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is the first special based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the first starting winning has occurred. This is a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special drawing game by the symbol display device 904A is established.

  The command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball having passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022 B, and the second starting winning occurs It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the 2nd special figure game by special symbol display device 904B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special view storage number in order to display the first special view storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 905HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 905HR or the like.

  In this embodiment, a first starting opening winning combination designation command or a second starting opening winning combination designation command which specifies whether the first starting winning opening has been started or the second starting winning opening has been started as holding storage information. While transmitting, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special map storage number and the second special image storage number are transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating the determination result of the big hit type, as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In this embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process in the start winning determination process of step S90101 of FIG. Whether or not it is determined to be "big hit", and if it is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined based on the random value MR2 'for big hit type determination. The determination is made, and the variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random value MR3 ′ for determination of the variation category. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command or the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 9012 is performed. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines whether the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designation command, or the big hit type. As well as being recognizable, it is possible to recognize a fluctuation category based on the value set in the fluctuation category command.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 90120 controls one or more effect devices (such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp 909). . Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 908 is an audio control command, the light emitting operation of the lamp 909 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, the blinking operation, and the lighting operation) is also referred to as a "lamp control command".

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random value MR1 ′ for determining a special display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as “game random numbers”.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random value MR1 'to MR5'. The CPU 90103 updates various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. It is also possible to count numerical data indicating a part of MRMR5 '.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”in the case where the variable display result is“ loss ” (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Also, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". As the jackpot fluctuation patterns, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the jackpot types may be prepared.

  For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, corresponding to the time reduction control to be executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state It is good. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 55 shows a specific example of variation categories and variation patterns in this embodiment. In FIG. 55, the fluctuation category “PA1 ′” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1'-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1 '". The fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA2′-1” to “PA2′-3” belong to the variation category “PA2 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3 '". The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4′-1” to “PA4′-4” belong to the variation category “PA4 ′”. The variation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) variation category. The variation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-4" belong to the variation category "PA5 '". The variation category "PB3 '" is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3 '". The fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns "PB4'-1" to "PB4'-4" belong to the variation category "PB4 '". The variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The variation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-4" belong to the variation category "PB5 '".

  The fluctuation pattern “PA2′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA2′-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the slip effect is performed. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2′-2” is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2′−1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the slip effect is performed. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA2′-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-3" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern "PA1'-1" belonging to the variation category "PA1 '" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the variation pattern "PA2'-1".

  The fluctuation pattern “PA3′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3′-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. It should be noted that the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-2" is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset . The same applies to the other fluctuation patterns in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (rendering) is executed as a gusset.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA5′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5′-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PA5′-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA5′-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3 '" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3′-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB4′-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5′-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The variation pattern “PB5′-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB5′-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5′-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition, in FIG. 55, although the description regarding the fluctuation pattern when the big hit classification is small among the small hit fluctuation pattern and the big hit fluctuation pattern is omitted, the lost fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, It is the same as the reach loss fluctuation pattern) and the big hit fluctuation pattern (except when the big hit type is sudden).

  The ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 52 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used when the CPU 90103 transmits control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011, The data etc. which comprise a table as shown to 55 are memorize | stored.

  FIG. 56 shows a configuration example of the special view display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, as a special view display result determination table, a first special view display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 56 (A) and a second special view display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 56 (B) It is prepared in advance. In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a determined special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 904A Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1 'of. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a finalized special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 904B Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1 'of.

  In the first special view display result determination table 90130A, the special view is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the positive change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 'for determination of the result is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the second special view display result determination table 90130 B, disturbance for special view display result determination depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state (low probability state) or a positive change state (high probability state) A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 'is assigned to the special-image display result of "big hit" or "loss".

  In each of the first special view display result determination table 90130A and the second special view display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state), it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) More decision values than at times are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is considered as a "big hit" compared to the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). The probability of being determined to control the state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special view display result determination table 90130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special view display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become a "small hit", so a normally variable winning ball device 906B is formed, for example, a short time state (low probability high base state) or positive change state (high probability high base state) In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of "small hit" which is difficult to obtain the winning ball, and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game .

  FIG. 57 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The big hit classification determination table 90131 determines the big hit classification to be any of a plurality of kinds based on the random number value MR2 'for the big hit classification determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". Is a table that is referenced to In the big hit classification determination table 90131, whether to execute the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special view game by the second special symbol display device 904B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is "non-probability", "probability", " It is assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable".

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 90131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be varied (also referred to as the variation special figure) is the first special figure, the predetermined value "82"-"99" value) is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable", but when the second special figure game is executed, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, The decision value is not assigned to the "probable" jackpot type. With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become "probable", so that it is possible to obtain a winning ball in the gaming state in which the gaming ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a difficult "probability" and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  Further, the ROM 90101 stores a variation category determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the type of variation category that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the determination ratio of each category, and the like. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 'for determination of the variation category. That is, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determined values (for example, the range and the number of the determined values, etc.) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are different from each other There is.

  Further, the ROM 90101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR5 'for fluctuation pattern determination. That is, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables in which the above-described determination values (for example, the range and the number of determination values, etc.) assigned to at least one variation pattern of a plurality of types of variation patterns differ from each other There is.

  The RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 52 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source created partially or entirely on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 58, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 58 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a second special view generic view reserve storage unit 90151C, and a game control flag setting unit A game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the first start winning occurs but has not been started yet The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical value data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. is stored as reserved data (first special view reserved information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (eg “4”) Do.

  The second special figure reserve storage unit 90151 B is a special figure game that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906 B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage As numerical data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. as reserve data (second special view reserve information), storage is performed until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg “4”) Do.

  The second special drawing popular figure retention storage unit 90151C is reserved data regarding a popular figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 despite the fact that the game ball that has passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 It stores (general drawing reservation information). For example, the second special-purpose-general-diagram suspension storage unit 90151C is associated with the suspension number in the order in which the gaming balls passed through the passage gate 9041, and the CPU 90103 extracts the random numbers from the random number circuit 90104 based on the passage of the gaming balls. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 'for determining the figure display result is stored as the reserve data (general drawing reserve information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, Second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 52 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the image display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 52 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  For example, the ROM 90121 stores a pending display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first pending display displayed in the first start winning combination storage display area 905HL to any of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of display mode that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the determination ratio of each mode. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the first pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 '(not shown) for determining the display mode of the first pending display. There is.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 90121 stores a pending display mode determination table to be referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second pending display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 905HR to any of a plurality of types. It is done. Specifically, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of display mode that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the determination ratio of each mode. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the second pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 '(not shown) for determining the display mode of the second pending display. There is.

  In addition, the ROM 90121 stores a holding effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether the holding effect (also referred to as “action effect” or “hold change effect”) is performed. Specifically, in the holding effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random value MR7 '(not shown) for the execution presence / absence determination of holding effect, respectively without holding effect execution and with execution being performed ) Is assigned. In this embodiment, the pending effect is a pre-reading advance notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending display displayed in the first start prize storage display area 905HL to a notice mode, and the second start prize storage display area 905HR is displayed. The pre-reading notice effect is to change the display mode of the pending display being displayed to the notice mode. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 905 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 905 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, the ROM 90121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) for changing a special image including active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 '(not shown) for determining presence / absence of active display change presentation, without and with active display change presentation respectively. Are assigned (determined values).

  In this embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing the special image into the notice mode. In other words, an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, and information according to the active display (for example, the active display or the periphery of the active display or characters and images displayed around the active display frame) are displayed as notices. It is an effect to be changed (main notice effect). For the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect and the success effect (also referred to as “active display change effect”) to be performed when changing the special image after the common effect is performed, and the common effect A failure effect (also referred to as “active display change cassette effect”) to be performed when the special image is not changed after the execution is included. The success effect is an effect of acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 905 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display region of the image display device 905, or acts on the special image in the display region of the image display device 905 It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, in the active display change effect, the first system change effect for changing the aspect of the special image to one of a plurality of aspects, which is the change of the first system, and the change of the aspect of the special image to the second system And a second system change effect to be changed to any of a plurality of modes. In the first system change effect, there is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and in the second system change effect, according to the second system change effect There is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect. In this embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is in the special image The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image).

  In addition, the first system change is referred to in the ROM 90121 to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect which is one of the active display change effects (a timing such as which timing of the change is to be executed). An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In this first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. In addition, the ROM 90121 stores effect execution timing determination tables of a plurality of first system change effects different from one another in type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, and the respective determination ratios It may be A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change presentation is assigned to each of the execution timings in the execution timing determination table of the first system change presentation. There is.

  In addition, the second system change is referred to in the ROM 90121 to determine the execution timing (the timing such as at which timing of the change) of the second system change effect which is one of the active display change effects. An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In the second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the second system change effect is performed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. In addition, the ROM 90121 stores effect execution timing determination tables of a plurality of second system change effects different from one another in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, and the determination ratio of each. It may be A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second systematic change presentation is assigned to each execution timing of the second systematic change presentation execution timing determination table. There is.

  Further, the ROM 90121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table for active display change effects stored in the ROM 90121, random number values (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of active display change effects for each of the effect patterns of active display change effects A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  In addition, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the effect model) Data etc. are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, a notice effect (including a pre-reading notice effect), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration in a period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special view game until the finalized special symbol as the special view display result is derived and displayed, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. Effect operation of variable display operation and reach effect of the symbol, re-lottery effect and the like, or various effect operation without variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, with respect to the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 905HL It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various performance operation | movements, such as a production | presentation, the holding | placing production | presentation with respect to the display mode of the pending | holding display in 2nd start prize memory display area 905HR, etc.).

  The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, It is sufficient if the contents of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. are set in series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 90120. A determination value corresponding to an execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation is set in advance.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the audio control data is data for specifying an audio output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 909 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light off operation) of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 9030 is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control for displaying an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 908 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 909 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data In the effective period, control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is performed to determine the contents of the effect.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or pattern data of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the effect device (the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) Advance the control of the movable member etc. provided in the effect model. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014 and the like. The display control unit 90123 receives an instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like .

  As an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation, the RAM 90122 mounted on the presentation control board 9012 shown in FIG. 52, for example, a presentation control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 59A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, etc. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting a first start winning reception command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 59 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 as one set of four commands. In the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A, a storage area is secured so as to be able to store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first pending storage count notification command among these commands in association with one another.

  The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands from the top of the free area of the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A in the order received at the first start winning. At the time of the first starting winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a first starting opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4" respectively. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 59B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 59B are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning a prize specified command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the first start opening winning combination designating command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 59 (B), the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B as shown in FIG. 59 (C) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total pending storage number are provided. . When there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (second starting opening winning designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (second pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 as one set of four commands. In the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B, a storage area is secured so as to be able to store a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command among these commands in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B in the order received at the second start winning. At the second start winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a second start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command , Change category command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 59C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B shown in FIG. 59C are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the second special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening winning a prize designation command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the second start opening winning combination designating command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 59C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting a first pre-read notice buffer 90194C as shown in FIG. 59 (D) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A of FIG. 59 (B) due to start of variable display of decorative design, etc. In the first read advance notice buffer 90194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C.

  Further, in this embodiment, data constituting the second preread notice buffer 90194D as shown in FIG. 59E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 90194 B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 90194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 90194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194 B of FIG. 59C, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second pre-read advance notice buffer 90194 D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Also, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the second prefetch notice buffer 90194D.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 60 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (step S9013).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 'to MR5' used on the main substrate 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 904B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 transmits a control command from the main substrate 9011 to the sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 by executing the command control processing (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 90155, effect control After setting control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 9012, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 60 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

  In the start winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first starting opening switch 9022A or the second starting opening switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, special map display Extract the random number value MR1 'for result judgment, the random number value MR2' for big hit type judgment, and the random number value MR3 'for fluctuation pattern judgment, and if it is the first start winning combination, the first special view reserve storage unit It is stored at the top of the vacant entry in 90151A, and in the case of the second start winning, it is stored at the top of the vacant entry in the second special view reservation storage unit 90151B.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 in FIG. 61, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is to be "big hit" or "small hit". To be done. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a process of deciding the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 55, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153 is decremented by 1 or 1 1 A first special view game (a special view game using a first special view) by the special symbol display device 904A or a second special view game by a second special symbol display device 904B (a special view using a second special view) A common timer measures the elapsed time regardless of whether it is a figure game). Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation processing in step S90112 may be processing for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special view game or the second special view game by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on or not, and when the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are both off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the variable display result becoming "big hit", etc., the process of performing the setting for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is in the open state may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", set the upper limit of the period when the big winning opening is in the open state to "29 seconds", and the number of big wins that will be the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, setting may be performed to set the normally open big hit state. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponds to "probable", and while setting the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is in the open state, to "0.1 seconds", the number of opening times of the winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting “15 times”, setting may be made to be a short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S90115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door, etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is updated to .

  The jackpot post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In this big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect as a rendering operation is notified by a rendering device such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, etc. The processing includes processing for waiting until, and processing for performing various settings for starting the probability change control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "probable" The setting for the small hit gaming state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the opening number of the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hit open processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, processing for stopping supply of a drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "10".

  The small hitting end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". In this small hitting end process, it waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period when the rendering operation informing the end of the small hitting gaming state is executed by the rendering device such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, etc. Processing is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 62 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 9012 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S9072 (step S9072: YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S9073), and command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S9074, the effect control process process is executed (step S9075). In the effect control process of step S 9075, for example, various effect devices such as display operation of effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, sound output operation from the speaker 908, light emission operation of the lamp 909, and drive operation of the effect model With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using the above, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 9011.

  Following the effect control process of step S 9075, effect random number updating process is executed (step S 9076) and the effect random number is counted by the random counter of effect control counter setting unit 90193 as various random number values used for effect control The numerical data representing the is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S9072.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main board 9011 transmitted via the relay board 9015 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. Determine

  When there is a reception command, for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first starting opening winning combination designation command. And when it is a 1st starting opening winning a prize specified command, 1st reservation memory number notification waiting time is set. For example, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

  If the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command, it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command. And when it is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command, 2nd reservation memory number notification waiting time is set. For example, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command. If the received command is not a symbol specifying command, it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command. If the received command is not a variable category command, it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command. Then, when it is the first pending storage number notification command, the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command, it is determined whether the receiving command is the second pending storage number notification command. When it is the second pending storage number notification command, the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clocking operation by the command reception control timer.

  When the reception command is a symbol designation command or when the reception command is a variation category command, the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process for the reception command received immediately before the reception command. If yes, the reception command is stored at the top of the free space in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A.

  When the reception command is a symbol designation command or when the reception command is a variation category command, the second pending storage number notification waiting time is in the process for the reception command received immediately before the reception command. If it is set, the received command is stored at the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B.

  If the reception command is not the second pending storage number notification command, the setting according to the other reception commands is performed. For example, when the received command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether the time is short or not.

  Start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command or second start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number As in the notification command), the effect control command received from the main substrate 9011 when the start winning combination occurs is also referred to as a command at the time of starting winning combination. In addition, the first holding storage number notification command, the second holding storage number notification command, the first starting opening winning combination designation command, and the second starting opening winning combination designation command are also referred to as holding storage information. Further, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S 9075 of FIG. 62 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 63, after the effect control CPU 90120 executes the volume state display process (step S90162), for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191, etc. One of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 as described below is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative design on the display device 905. When it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on the image display device 905 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Processing to determine the finalized decoration pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. in order to perform variable display of other various display operations, or by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to an active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a production mode of various performances or various performances (for example, active display which is a main preview production) It includes a process of determining a change effect, and an effect mode of the active display change effect). Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192. The various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. Specifically, based on the read control data, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 905 to display it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 9013. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control to output effect sound from the speaker 908 and control to output an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 9014 to turn on / off / flash the lamp 909 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol has been read out from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 has been received, etc. The finalized design is displayed as a final stop design, which is the result of variable display of the decoration design. If the finalized display is made to display the finalized decorative symbol in response to the end code being read out from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed Even if the effect control command from the main substrate 9011 is not used, it is possible to derive and display the decoration pattern autonomously on the side of the effect control substrate 9012 and fix the variable display result. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special drawing in step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special drawing, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 has been received. If the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state when the hit start designation command is received, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit during the presentation processing “6”. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect processing. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", and the value of the effect process flag is an initial value. Update to "0".

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this small hitting medium effect processing, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and executes step S90172. Similar to the variable-in-display effect processing, various effects control in the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 9011, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting ending effect. .

  The small hitting end effect process of step S 90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 90120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and proceeds to step S90172. Similar to the variable-in-display effect processing, various effects control at the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  The jackpot inside effect process in step S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and displays variable in step S90172. Similar to the middle effect processing, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the big hit internal rendering process, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 9011, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and displays variable in step S90172. Similar to the effect processing, various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals, etc. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90163 of FIG. 63 as the sound volume status display processing. In the volume state display process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a big hit effect is being performed (step S801). In the process of step S801, for example, whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "4" may be confirmed.

  If the jackpot effect is not in progress in step S90801 (step S90801; No), it is determined whether the jackpot operation flag is set to the on state (step S90802). The big hit operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the big hit effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the big hit operation flag is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122 shown in FIG. 52 described above.

  If the big hit operation flag is not set to the on state at step S 90802 (step S 90802; No), display control is performed to display the volume status display on the image display device 905 (step S 90803). For example, a volume status display image VL as a volume status display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. That is, the volume condition display image VL indicating the current volume output level is displayed. For example, the volume status display image VL is an image display of an aspect in which five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side are lighted up with left alignment, and in FIG. 73, five image display sections are three from the left end. It is an image display of the aspect which made the part light.

  Specifically, when the sound volume is a predetermined minimum level (the sound volume output is a bass level suppressed lower than normal and not a mute level), the image display of an aspect in which all the five image display sections are turned off is performed. Note that the lowest level may be the muffling level. In addition, in the case of the first level which is one larger than the lowest level, the image display of the aspect in which the image display section at the leftmost end is lit is performed. In the case of the second level which is larger by one than the first level, the image display of an aspect in which two image display sections from the left end are lighted is obtained. In the case of the third level (that is, the normal level) which is larger than the second level by one, the image display of an aspect in which three image display sections from the left end light up is obtained. In the case of the fourth level, which is one larger than the third level, the image display of an aspect in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display of an aspect in which all the five image display sections are lit is performed. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume condition display image VL is a meter-type display mode, but the display mode is not limited to this, and a numerical-type display mode or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) It is also possible to use various display modes, such as changing the order from yellow to red and displaying the larger the red.

  When the big hit time operation flag is set (on state) in step S 90802 (step S 90802; Yes), the display control for causing the image display device 905 to continue the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) is performed. The process is executed (step S90804), and the big hit operation flag is reset to the off state (step S90805). Steps S90804 and S90805 are processing for continuing the volume condition display when there is a volume change operation immediately before the end of the jackpot effect. Thus, the volume state display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the big hit effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the big hit effect, and is erased once at the end timing of the big hit effect Can be prevented.

  After executing the process of step S90803 or after performing the process of step S90805, it is determined whether there is a volume change operation (step S90806). If there is a volume change operation (Step S90806; Yes), the volume status display after the change (display of the volume status display image VL after the change) and the volume setting after the change are executed (Step S90807). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player operates the stick controller 9031A (step S90806; Yes), a display for displaying the volume status display image VL after the change on the image display device 905 Control is executed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 90122, and the changed volume setting is performed such that the voice control board 9013 is controlled to output the changed volume from the speakers 908L and 8R (step S90807).

  For example, the stick controller 9031A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 9031A once in the right direction, the volume status display image VL after the change is increased by one. While being displayed on the image display device 905, the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R is raised by one level. Conversely, when the player operates the stick controller 9031A once in the left direction, the volume status display image VL after the change in which the mode in which the image display section is lit is decreased by one is displayed on the image display device 905. , The volume output from the speakers 908L, 908R is reduced by one level.

  After the process of step S90807 is performed, it is determined whether the non-big hit time operation flag is set to the on state (step S90808). The non-big hit operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 9031A at times other than during the big hit effect. The data indicating the ON state or OFF state of the non-big hit operation flag is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122 shown in FIG. 52 described above.

  On the other hand, if there is no volume change operation (step S90806; No), it is determined whether the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state (step S90809).

  Whether the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation in step S90808 or when the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes) It is determined whether or not it is (step S90810). If the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (Step S90810; Yes), the non-big hit operation flag is reset to the OFF state (Step S90811). Note that the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be from the first operation until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses, or from the last operation if there are multiple operations within the predetermined period It may be until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. Further, in this embodiment, although the predetermined period after the operation is performed, the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may be elapsed after the display start of the volume state display image VL.

  Returning to step S90801, if the jackpot effect is being performed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state (step S90812). If the non-big hit operation flag is off (step S90812; No), it is determined whether the big hit operation flag is set to on (step S90813). If the big hit operation flag is off (step S90813; No), processing to delete the volume status display is executed (step S90814). Steps S90813 and S90814 are, in principle, processing for not displaying the volume status during the big hit effect. Specifically, in the second state in which the jackpot effect (specific effect) is executed, that is, in the gaming state during the jackpot effect, as long as there is no request by the player, the sound volume is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The status display image VL is not displayed (the volume status display image VL is deleted). As a result, during execution of the jackpot effect which is an example of a game effect (effect including an important advance notice etc.) particularly desired to be shown to the player, the volume status display image VL can not be displayed, and the effect of the jackpot effect is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  If the non-big-hit operation flag is off in step S809 (step S809; No), and if the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S810 (step S810; No), the process of step S811 is performed. After that, if the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state in step S812 (step S812; Yes), if the big hit operation flag is set to the on state in step S813 (step S813; Yes) After the process of step S90814 is performed, the volume status display process ends.

  Note that according to the volume status display process (step S90162) shown in FIG. 64, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 63 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, for example, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S90522). When it is determined that the special view display result is "loss" (step S90522; Yes), for example, the fluctuation pattern designated by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from main substrate 9011 or the like. Non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" (ie, "PA1'-1", "PA2'-1", "PA2'-2", "PA2'-" in FIG. 55) It is determined whether or not it is 3 ") (step S90523).

  If it is determined in step S90523 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S90523; Yes), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S90524). As an example, in the process of step S90524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905 L in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like With reference to the finalized decorative symbol, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decoration symbol is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In the process of step S90524, the determined decorative symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol advance is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S90523 that it is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S90523; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S90525). As an example, in the process of step S90525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 90193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the left and right decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed. The symbol number determines the same decorative symbol. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S90522; No), the special view display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special view display It is determined whether the result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S90526). When it is determined to be "probable" or "small hit" (step S90526; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "probable" or "small hit", such as an opening chance eye A combination of symbols is determined (step S90527). In this case, numerical data representing a random number value for determining the chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined by referring to and the like.

  When it is determined in step S90526 that "non-probability" or "probability" other than "probable" or "small hit" (step S90526; No), a finalized design that constitutes the big hit combination is a finalized decorative symbol A combination is determined (step S90528). As an example, in the process of step S90528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193 or the like is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., it is displayed in a stop on the screen of the image display device 905 in the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", or whether or not a promotion effect is made during the jackpot, etc., a decision is made to determine a different decoration pattern as the decoration pattern. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability", any one decorative pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols, and it is decided to be a definite decorative pattern that constitutes a non-probable large hit combination. Just do it. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one decorative pattern is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable patterns, and a finalized decorative symbol forming a non-probable big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination You can decide on At this time, when it is decided to the fixed decoration symbol of the non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probability variation state in re-lottery production in the variable display is not done, it is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state It should just be notified that it is controlled to a definite change state by a jackpot promotion promotion etc. On the other hand, when it is determined to the definite decoration symbol of the big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the positive change state is performed in the re-lottery production in the variable display or without performing the re-lottery production.

  If it is specified that the time is not short in the command analysis process (step S 90155: NO), the reserve digest process is executed after executing any of the processes of steps S90524, S90525, S90527, and S90528 (step S90531). . Specifically, the active display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is linked to the first special figure game), the first start winning memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 905 HL is displayed on the active display area AHA (A special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 905 HL ). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the active display corresponding to the pending display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 905HL to move to the active display area AHA and causes the active display to be displayed. By setting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 etc. Active display area AHA displays an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of area 905HL. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special drawing game.

  In addition, in the process of step S90531, when there is a hold display other than the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning a prize storage display area 905HL, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the other hold display as the first display. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start winning storage display area 905HR after shifting in the start winning storage display area 905HL, the other hold display is shifted in the second start winning storage display area 905HR.

  After the process of step S90531 is executed, an effect execution setting process is executed (step S90532). In the effect execution setting process, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change presentation for the active display corresponding to the change, a process of determining the type of the active display change presentation when executing, and an active process of executing Processing to determine the effect mode of the display change effect, processing to determine the execution timing of the active display change effect when executed, processing to set (or reset) the effect control pattern based on these determination results, etc. It may be possible to

  After the process of step S90532 is executed, for example, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (step S90534) . Subsequently, the variable display etc. start setting process is performed to make settings for starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol etc. in the image display device 905 (step S90535). For example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the effect execution setting process of step S90532, is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123, etc. The sound for the speaker 908 is transmitted to the sound control board 9013 or the like by transmitting to the sound control board 9013 a setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 905 or transmitting an effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern. Setting for starting light emission in the lamp 909 is performed by transmitting to the lamp control board 9014 a setting for starting output and transmitting an electric decoration signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 9014 .

  After executing the processing of step S90535, the command stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 90194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 90194B is digested (step S90536). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special view game, effect control CPU 90120 is the most frequently selected command associated with first start winning reception command buffer 90194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening winning combination specified The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. Of the commands (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among Monitor, a command stored in corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the deleted command area, shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of step S90536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first read advance notice buffer 90194C or the second read notice notice buffer 90194D provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed according to the deletion or shift of the command. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S90537), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S90532) will be described in detail. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of effect execution setting processing executed in step S90532 of FIG. Referring to FIG. 66, first, the effect control CPU 90120 is to change the change pattern of the variable display to be started with the change pattern of a predetermined super reach (for example, super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 55). It is determined whether there is any (step S90541).

  If it is determined that the pattern is a predetermined super reach fluctuation pattern (YES in step S90541), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the serif notice based on the serif notice effect determination table, and if so, the serif notice. The type of is determined (step S90542). A serif announcement is an effect that indicates whether or not a big hit will be made on the character's speech.

  FIG. 67 is a view showing a configuration example of a speech advance announcement effect determination table. Referring to FIG. 67, when it is determined that the predetermined super reach variation pattern is to be a big hit, it is determined that the serif announcement is not performed with a probability of 50%, and the character color of the serif of character E is golden with a probability of 20%. A type of serif notice is determined, a type with 15% probability that the text of the character F of the character F is gold is determined with a probability of 15%, and a type with a probability of 10% of the text of the character E of the character E is red The serif announcement of is determined, and with a probability of 5%, a serif announcement of a type in which the character color of the character F of the character F is red is determined.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined super reach variation pattern causes a deviation, it is determined that the serif announcement is not executed with a probability of 90%, and a serif announcement of a type in which the character color of the character E of the character E is gold with a probability of 0%. Is determined, with a probability of 0%, a serif notice of a type in which the character color of the character F of the character F is gold is determined, and a serif notice of a type in which the character color of the serif of the character E is red is determined with a probability of 3%. With a probability of 7%, a serif announcement of the kind in which the character color of the serif of the character F is red is determined.

  That is, the expectation for a big hit is higher in the case where the serif announcement of the character E is performed than in the case where the serif announcement of the character F is performed, and the red character is used when the serif announcement of the golden character color is performed. The type of serif announcement is determined so that the big hit expectation is higher than when the color serif announcement is made.

  Referring back to FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect result of the character lottery effect and the character color lottery effect according to the determination result of the speech preview determined in step S90542 (step S90543). The character lottery effect is an effect of lottery the type of the character used in the serif announcement, and is an effect of notifying the type of the character determined as a result of the lottery as the effect result. The character color lottery effect is an effect of lottery the character color of the speech used in the announcement of the speech, and is an effect of informing the character color determined as a result of the lottery as the effect result. For example, when a dialogue warning of a type in which the character color of the character E of the character E is gold is determined, the character E is determined as an effect result of the character lottery effect, and gold is determined as an effect result of the character color lottery effect. Be done.

  After step S 90543, and if it is determined that the predetermined super reach fluctuation pattern is not (NO in step S 90541), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the content of another effect. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 returns the process to be performed to the caller.

  FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 90120 first subtracts 1 from the decorative symbol variation time timer value (step S90710), and determines whether the decorative symbol variation time timer value has become 0 or not. (Step S90711). That is, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (whether or not the decorative symbol variation time has elapsed).

  If it is determined that the decorative symbol variation time timer value is not 0 (NO in step S90711), effect execution processing is executed (step S90715). Thereafter, the variable display effect processing ends. The effect execution process will be described later.

  If it is determined that the decorative symbol variation time timer value has become 0 (YES in step S90711), the effect control CPU 90120 changes the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special processing waiting process (step S90173). The process is updated (step S90713), and the variable display effect processing ends.

  FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect execution process executed in step S90715 of FIG. Referring to FIG. 69, first, CPU 90120 for effect control controls the execution of variable display according to the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S90720).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is time to start execution of a character lottery effect (step S90721). The execution start timing of the character lottery effect is, for example, immediately after reaching the reach state. If it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the character lottery effect (YES in step S90721), the effect control CPU 90120 controls to start the execution of the character lottery effect (step S90722).

  After step S90722, and when it is determined that it is not the execution start timing of the character lottery effect (NO in step S90721), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is the execution start timing of the character color lottery effect (step S90723). The execution start timing of the character color lottery effect is, for example, immediately after the effect result of the character lottery effect is displayed. If it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the character color lottery effect (YES in step S90723), the effect control CPU 90120 controls to start the execution of the character color lottery effect (step S90724).

  After step S90724, and when it is determined that it is not the execution start timing of the character color lottery effect (NO in step S90723), the CPU for effect control 90120 determines whether it is the execution start timing of the announcement of the speech. Step S90725). The execution start timing of the presentation of the dialogue is, for example, after the presentation result of the character color lottery presentation is displayed and before the derivation display of the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, what timing it is May be If it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the presentation of the dialogue warning (YES in step S90725), the CPU 90120 for presentation control performs control to start the execution of the announcement of the speech announcement (step S90726).

  After step S90726, and when it is determined that it is not the execution start timing of the announcement of the serif notice (NO in step S90725), the CPU 90120 for effect control returns the process to be executed to the call source.

  FIG. 70 is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a character lottery effect, a character color lottery effect, and a serif announcement. As shown in FIG. 70 (A), by performing step S90720 of FIG. 69, the decorative display is variably displayed, and when it is determined to be in the reach state, the reach state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), by performing step S90722 of FIG. 69, a character lottery effect for determining the type of the character of the speech advance announcement effect is executed. Here, in the character lottery effect, the character “E” indicating the character E in two areas facing each other among four areas divided into four 90-degree fan-shaped circles, the character F in the remaining two areas In the roulette in which the letter "F" is written, the area where the color is to be changed is switched sequentially, and finally it is stopped in a state where the color of any one area is changed, and the letters written in that area are rendered It is an effect which shows a result. FIG. 70 (B) shows a state in which the character E is determined as the effect result.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (C), by performing step S90724 of FIG. 69, a character color lottery effect for determining the character color of the speech notification effect is executed. In this case, the character color lottery effect consists of the two characters facing each other among the four 90-degree fan-shaped areas of the circle, the "gold" letter indicating the golden character color, and the remaining two areas. In the roulette in which the character of "red" showing the red character color is written, the area to change the color is switched sequentially, and finally, the color of one of the areas is stopped in the state of changing the color. The character which is done is the production which shows the production result. FIG. 70C shows a state in which the red character color is determined as the effect result.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (D), when the effect of super reach is being executed, the effect of serif notice is executed as a cut-in effect. In the presentation of the dialogue warning, it is suggested whether or not the character of the type determined in the character lottery presentation will be a big hit in the dialogue of the character color determined in the character lottery drawing. In FIG. 70 (D), the dialogue with the character E and the "chance" of the red character color indicating that the big hit reliability is a predetermined ratio is displayed in the cut-in area. Further, in FIG. 70 (D), in the cut-in area, an icon showing an effect result of the character lottery effect and the character color lottery effect (here, an icon with the characters “E, red” described) is displayed. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (E), when it is determined to be a big hit, a combination of big hit symbols (here, “777”) is derived and displayed after the super reach presentation.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart of an example of the jackpot effect processing. As shown in FIG. 71, in the big hit rendering process, the CPU for effect control 90120 determines whether or not it is the big hit end timing (step S90901), and if it is not the big hit end timing (step S90901; No), production control A big hit effect operation control according to the pattern is executed (step S90902). Then, after the process of step S90902 is performed, a temporary display process is performed (step S90903).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of temporary display processing. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state (step S90831). If the non-big-hit operation flag is set to the on state (step S90831; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S90832). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (Step S90832; No), it is determined whether there is a volume change operation (Step S90833).

  If there is a volume change operation (step S90833; Yes), the volume status display after the change (display of the volume status display image VL after the change) and the volume setting after the change are executed (step S90834). In this step S90834, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player operates the stick controller 9031A (for example, operating in the left direction or the right direction), the volume display image VL after changing to the image display device 905 is displayed. Executes the display control to be displayed, stores the volume setting value after change in the RAM 90122, and performs the volume setting after change such as controlling the voice control board 9013 so that the volume after change is output from the speakers 908L, 908R. (Step S90834).

  On the other hand, when the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (Step S90832; Yes), processing for deleting the volume status display image for deleting the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 905 is executed (Step S90835), The non-big-hit operation flag is reset to the off state (step S90836).

  If the non-big-hit operation flag is off at step S90831 (step S90831; No), or if there is no volume change operation at step S90833 (step S90833; No), or after step S90834 has been executed, or After the processing of S 836 is performed, it is determined whether the big hit time operation flag is set to the on state (step S 908 37).

  If the big hit operation flag is off in step S90837 (step S90837; No), it is determined whether there is an operation start acceptance of volume change (step S90838). If there is an operation start acceptance in step S 90838 (step S 90838; Yes), that is, if the controller sensor unit 9035 A detects that the player operates the stick controller 9031 A, the current volume status of the image display device 905 Display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S90839). As shown in FIG. 73C, during the big hit effect, the current volume state display image VL is displayed on the image display device 905 according to the operation of the stick controller 9031A. After executing the process of step S90839, the big hit time operation flag is set to the on state (step S90840).

  If the big hit time operation flag is on at step S90837 (step S90837; Yes) or after the process of step S90840 has been performed, it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S908) S90841). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (Step S90841; No), it is determined whether there is a volume change operation (Step S90842). If there is a volume change operation (Step S90842; Yes), the display of the volume state display image VL after the change and the volume setting after the change are executed (Step S90843). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player operates the stick controller 9031A in the left-right direction (step S90842; Yes), the change according to the number of times the stick controller 9031A is operated in the left-right direction The display control for displaying the subsequent volume status display image VL on the image display device 905 is executed, and the volume setting value after change according to the number of times of operation is stored in the RAM 90122, and the volume output after change from the speakers 908L and 908R. Then, the post-change volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 9013 is executed (step S 90843).

  If the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S90841; Yes), processing for erasing the volume status display is executed (step S90844). For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), when the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the display of the volume state display image VL is erased. That is, the volume status display is hidden. As described above, during the big hit effect, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation, and the volume status display image VL when the big hit is still being performed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. Is supposed to be erased.

  After executing the processing of step S90844, the big hit time operation flag is reset to the off state (step S90845). Then, when the operation start acceptance is not received at step S90838 (step S90838; No), when the volume change operation is not performed at step S90842 (step S90842; No), or after the processing of step S90843 is performed, or step S90845 After executing the process of (1), the temporary display process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 71, if it is the big hit end timing (step S90901; Yes), the big hit end control is executed (step S90904), and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the ending presentation processing. After that (step S90905), the jackpot effect processing ends.

  When the ending effect display is performed in the process of step S90904, the volume state display image VL may be displayed on the image display device 905 also during the ending effect period.

  Next, the case where there is a volume change operation during the jackpot effect will be described using FIG. FIG. 73 shows an example of effect in the case of volume change operation in the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit combination, and as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the big hit effect is started. In FIG. 73 (B), a round display of “Round 1” indicating the first round game is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 73B, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the image display device 905 by the volume status display erase process (step S90814) shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), there is an operation of the stick controller 9031A when the round display of “Round 4” indicating the fourth round game being played during the big hit, for example, is performed according to this operation. The volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 905. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 9031A once in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the volume status display image VL after the change in which the number of lighted modes of the image display section is increased. While the (volume state display image VL at the fourth level) is displayed on the image display device 905, the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R is raised by one level (the volume output is the fourth level). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation, as shown in FIG. 73E, the volume state display image VL is erased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 73 (C) and (D), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the big hit is a game other than during the big hit as shown in FIG. 73 (A). As the display mode of the volume state display image VL in the state (first state) is displayed in the same manner, the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be made easy to understand. As described above, the first state and the second state may not be the same. For example, the volume state display image VL in the second state may display a display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state, [2] The same display as the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed on a display location different from that in the first state, or [3] a display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed It may be displayed on a different display place from the case of the state.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the above-described embodiment, the volume of the sound according to the player's request is suppressed while suppressing the decrease of the effect of the specific effect (for example, the round effect during the big hit, the bless effect during the big hit, etc.) The situation display image VL can be displayed (the adjustment situation of the presentation adjustment can be displayed), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, in the big hit gaming state, the volume status display image VL is not displayed as long as there is no request from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL may not be displayed on the image display device 905 unless there is a request from the player.

[Summary]
Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.

(1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine),
Variable display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 905, game control microcomputer 90100, first special symbol display device 904A for performing variable display (for example, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of special symbol) , The second special symbol display device 904B),
Specific effect executing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90726 in FIG. 69) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, speech preview) during execution of the variable display;
A first selection effect executing means (for example, a character lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (B)) for the first type of the specific effect (for example, the type of the character of the speech preview) (for example, see FIG. 70 (B)) For example, the effect control CPU 90120, the image display device 905, and step S90722) in FIG.
The second selection effect (for example, character color lottery effect, see FIG. 70 (C)) of the second type of the specific effect (for example, the speech balloon and the character color) Effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, image display device 905, step S 90724 in FIG. 69), and
The specific effect execution means corresponds to an aspect corresponding to a combination of the effect result of the first selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect (for example, the character of the selected type and the color of the balloon and the characters It is possible to execute the specific effect (for example, see FIG. 70D) of the combined mode).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a plurality of selection effects and their effects as well as the specific effects. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

(1-2) In the gaming machine of (1-1) above,
The degree of expectation in which content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the combination of the rendering result of the first selection effect and the rendering result of the second selection effect (for example, see FIG. 67).

(2) In the gaming machine of (1-1) or (1-2) above,
The mode of the first type is the type of character (for example, character E, character F) used in the specific effect, and the degree of expectation of being notified of advantageous content for the player is different for each type of character (for example, , See Figure 67),
The second type of aspect is the color (for example, gold, red) of the character used in the specific effect, and the degree of expectation that the content advantageous to the player is notified differs for each color of the character (for example, FIG. See 67).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the specific effect but also to the selection effect of the character type and the character color and the effect results thereof. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (2) above,
The first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means respectively have different display areas (for example, different display areas of the image display device 905) different in the first selection effect and the second selection effect. It may be a display area).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly and easily visually recognize a plurality of selection effects and their effect results.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (3) above,
The first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means can notify the presentation result of the first selection effect and the presentation result of the second selection effect at different timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 69). Steps S90721 and S90723, and FIGS. 70B and 70C are referred.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly and easily visually recognize the rendering results of the plurality of selection effects.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (4) above,
The predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing predetermined effects (for example, effects of super reach, variable display effects of decorative symbols) for notifying whether it is advantageous for the player different from the specific effect or not The image display apparatus 905 further includes step S90720) in FIG.
The predetermined effect execution means can execute reach effect as the predetermined effect,
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect at an execution time at least a part of which overlaps with the execution time of the predetermined effect (for example, a speech announcement is performed at a reach establishment time).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game when the reach effect is performed.

(6) In any of the above (1-1) to (5) gaming machines,
A special image (for example, a character of a selected type) showing a combination of the rendering result of the first selection effect and the rendering result of the second selection effect when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means Special image display means (for example, effect control CPU 90120, image display device 905, FIG. 69) for displaying an image showing an image and an image showing an aspect of the color of a balloon or a character (see FIG. 70D). Step S90726) is further included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly confirm the rendering results of the plurality of selection effects when the specific effect is being executed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (6) above,
Specific effect determination means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control, step S 90542 in FIG. 66, FIG. 67) for determining the content of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means;
Selection effect determination means (for example, CPU for effect control 90120, FIG. 66) for determining the contents of the first selection effect and the second selection effect respectively executed by the first selection effect execution means and the second selection effect execution means And step S 90543) of the
The selection effect determining means determines the contents of the first selection effect and the second selection effect corresponding to the contents of the specific effect determined by the specific effect determining means.

  Here, when the content of the specific effect is determined based on the effect of the first selection effect and the second selection effect after being determined separately, two determinations of the first selection effect and the second selection effect are made. It needs some processing to do. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the above (7), since the first selection effect and the second selection effect are automatically determined if the specific effect is determined, only one determination of the specific effect is sufficient. As a result, the content of the presentation can be efficiently determined by simple processing.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (7) above,
According to the player's operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 9031A, the predetermined operation of the player, etc.), effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) regarding the game is possible.
When adjusting the effect, it is possible to display the adjustment condition of the effect adjustment (for example, the volume adjustment condition, the brightness adjustment condition, the mode switching condition, etc.),
First state (for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state other than during super reach effect, or a customer waiting state, etc., not displaying an error, in a slot machine, a gaming state other than during continuous effect, or a customer In the waiting state or the like and the state where the error is not displayed, etc.) the adjustment status is visibly displayed regardless of the player's operation (for example, the volume control is performed according to the processing execution of step S90162 in FIG. The status is displayed on the image display device 905, etc.),
A second state (for example, a jackpot gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine) which is a state different from the first state and executes a special effect (for example, a jackpot effect in a pachinko gaming machine, a super reach effect, a continuous staging in a slot machine, etc. In the gaming state during super reach effect, the gaming state during continuous effect in slot machines, etc., the adjustment status is made difficult to visually recognize or invisible (for example, processing execution such as step S90814 in FIG. 64 by CPU 90120 for effect control) According to the volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 905, etc.), the adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's operation (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 9031A, etc.) Step S90903 of FIG. 71 by the effect control CPU 90120. Such as volume adjustment status is displayed for a predetermined period in the image display apparatus 905 according to the process execution).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the special effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Next, modified examples of the other embodiments described above will be described.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S 90542 in FIG. 66 and in FIG. 67, the character type of the effect of the serif announcement and the character color of the serif are determined in a single drawing by a combination. I did it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to determine the type of the character of the speech advance presentation effect and the character color of the speech by two separate lotterys.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the serif announcement is performed as a cut-in effect during reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a serif announcement effect may be performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern before reaching the reach state. The presentation of the speech prior notice may be executed as the main presentation in the reach state instead of the cut-in effect even in the reach state. The presentation of the speech preview may be performed during the variable display or the big hit state prior to the variable display of the prefetch target as the prefetch announcement production.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 67, it is possible to determine the gold color when it is determined to be a big hit as the character color of the serif character of the announcement of the serif announcement. However, when it was decided that it was decided to be out, it was made not to decide the gold color. In other words, it is decided that the presentation of the serif announcement of the golden character color is a jackpot decision presentation notifying that it is decided that the jackpot will be decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to change the color to golden and have a serif announcement effect of a rainbow character color be a big hit finalization effect. Also, the presentation of the speech announcement of the specific type of character may be a big hit finalization presentation.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, the first selection effect (for example, character lottery effect) and the second selection effect (for example, character color lottery effect) are respectively displayed in different display areas of the same image display device 905. It was made to be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first selection effect and the second selection effect may be displayed in display areas of different display devices. Furthermore, the specific effect (rendering effect of the announcement of the speech) may be displayed in the display area of the display device different from the display device on which the first selection effect and the second selection effect are displayed.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment such as the volume adjustment status even during the symbol determination period of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the adjustment state of the effect adjustment is displayed during the variable display, the adjustment state of the effect adjustment when the variable display is ended (for example, when the symbol determination command is received) Is temporarily not displayed, and the adjustment status of the effect adjustment is again displayed at the start of a new variable display (for example, when the first and second change start commands, the change pattern specification command, and the variable display result notification command are received) It may be displayed on the display device 905.

  Thereby, the visibility of the display result of the variable display can be secured, and the false recognition of the display result can be prevented. Note that the effect adjustment itself may not be possible during the symbol determination period.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S 90543 in FIG. 66, the same character type as the character of the serif announcement effect determined in step S 90542 and the character color of the line are displayed in the character lottery effect It was decided as the result and the result result of the character color lottery effect.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character type and character color of the serif announcement effect determined and the percentage of the character based on whether or not to be a big hit, the character indicated by the character lottery effect production results The type and the character color indicated by the effect result of the character color lottery effect may be determined again. For example, in the case of a big hit, the type and character color of the character with a low probability of a big hit in the speech preview effect are higher than in the case of the out of phase. It may be determined as a result.

  In this way, the character lottery effect shows the type of the character with a low expectation of big hit, or the character color lottery effect shows the type of a character with a low expectation of big hit. Even if there is a character type and character color with a high expectation for a big hit in the dialogue announcement effect, the type of character with a high expectation for a big hit is indicated in the result of the character lottery effect, or a character color lottery The player can be expected to be a big hit rather than when the type of character color with a high degree of expectation is indicated by the result of the presentation.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, it is assumed that the presentation of the speech advance notice is a combination aspect of the presentation result of the character lottery presentation and the character color lottery presentation. If the specific effect is a combination aspect of the effects of the first selection effect and the second selection effect, even if the other first selection effect and the second selection effect and their effect results are other Good. For example, the aspect of the rendering result may not be an aspect of display but an aspect of sound or a light emission aspect.

  (8) The device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 905 do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. In the scope, arbitrary changes and modifications are possible.

  (9) For example, in the probability variation control, the gaming machine may be provided with a specific area in advance in the special winning opening, and controlled to a probability variation state based on passage of the gaming ball through the particular area. For example, the game ball enters a specific area in the special winning opening by being assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" based on the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type. It may be a gaming machine which is controlled to be in a gaming state that is easy to make, and is controlled to be in a definite variation state based on passage of a gaming ball through this specific area.

  (10) For example, using the frequency which is the gaming value of the size specified by the recorded information of the game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in the game is awarded and awarded The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving the game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area using the played game score or the game score awarded by the game winning. .

  (11) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  (12) Also, the execution form of the game is not limited to one executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but also temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly, using hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (13) Although the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated in the embodiment described above, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100% Among them, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, after the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, after the end of the big hit gaming state, showed the example of the probability variation state control unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, the probability variation determination device controlled to a probability variation state when the detection means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of special symbols including the numbers indicating "0" to "9" and the symbols indicating "-", or the lighting pattern of each segment not limited to numbers and symbols, etc. An example was shown to change the display. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b or the special symbol variably displayed is a number indicating "0" to "9" or a symbol indicating "-" It is not limited to what consists of etc. For example, the lighting pattern in the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, or a pattern in which all the lights are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, lost pattern) And the one that repeats alternately is also included in the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Also, the special symbol displayed during the variable display and the special symbol displayed as the variable display result may be different. As a variable display of special symbols, for example, a display that blinks "-" is performed, and as a result of variable display, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "lost", etc.) Displaying the special symbol is also included in the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, blinking or scrolling display of one kind of decorative design is also included in the variable display of decorative design. The lighting pattern in the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, or a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern (for example, lost pattern) in which at least a part of the LEDs are lit. Repeating alternately is also included in the variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, the decorative pattern or the normal pattern displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative pattern or the normal pattern displayed as the variable display result.

  (16) The embodiment described above can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to gaming machines in general for playing a game. For example, it can be applied to a slot machine.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st storage memory display 9b 2nd storage memory display 9F active display area 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start Prize winning opening 20 special variable winning prize ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 movable member 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko gaming machine 905 Image display device 905HL 1st start winning memory display area 905HR 2nd start winning memory display area 905H Start winning memory display area 9011 Main board 9012 Effect control board 90100 Microcomputer for game control 900123 Display control part

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Variable display execution means for performing variable display;
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
State change display means capable of displaying a state change display that can be changed stepwise;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect during execution of variable display;
First selection effect executing means capable of executing a first selection effect on the first type aspect of the specific effect;
And a second selection effect executing unit capable of executing a second selection effect on the second type of the specific effect.
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes having different degrees of expectation, and according to the display stage of the state change display, the display mode of any of the plurality of types of display modes It is possible to change and display a specific display,
Also specific display after the change is a case which is displayed by the same display mode, different expectations in accordance with the display stage of the status change display,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect in an aspect corresponding to a combination of the effect result of the first selection effect and the effect result of the second selection effect.
A game machine characterized by